WO2023165425A1 - Communication method and apparatus, and device - Google Patents

Communication method and apparatus, and device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2023165425A1
WO2023165425A1 PCT/CN2023/078172 CN2023078172W WO2023165425A1 WO 2023165425 A1 WO2023165425 A1 WO 2023165425A1 CN 2023078172 W CN2023078172 W CN 2023078172W WO 2023165425 A1 WO2023165425 A1 WO 2023165425A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
information
terminal device
location
location information
positioning
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2023/078172
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
许胜锋
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Publication of WO2023165425A1 publication Critical patent/WO2023165425A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W64/00Locating users or terminals or network equipment for network management purposes, e.g. mobility management
    • H04W64/006Locating users or terminals or network equipment for network management purposes, e.g. mobility management with additional information processing, e.g. for direction or speed determination
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04BTRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/14Relay systems
    • H04B7/15Active relay systems
    • H04B7/185Space-based or airborne stations; Stations for satellite systems
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04BTRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/14Relay systems
    • H04B7/15Active relay systems
    • H04B7/185Space-based or airborne stations; Stations for satellite systems
    • H04B7/18502Airborne stations
    • H04B7/18506Communications with or from aircraft, i.e. aeronautical mobile service
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/003Arrangements for allocating sub-channels of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0053Allocation of signaling, i.e. of overhead other than pilot signals
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/003Arrangements for allocating sub-channels of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0078Timing of allocation
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W64/00Locating users or terminals or network equipment for network management purposes, e.g. mobility management

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the technical field of communication, and in particular to a communication method, device and equipment.
  • Unmanned aerial vehicle (uncrewed aerial vehicle, UAV) referred to as UAV, is a kind of unmanned aerial vehicle with autonomous power, which can perform various tasks through manual control or automatic driving.
  • UAV unmanned aerial vehicle
  • fields such as agricultural plant protection, power inspection, police law enforcement, geological exploration, environmental monitoring, forest fire prevention, and film and television aerial photography and other fields.
  • UAV and UAV controller together form an uncrewed aerial system (UAS).
  • UAV service supplier USS
  • the unmanned aerial system service provider is responsible for the flight management of the UAV.
  • USS can manage the flight of UAV through a mobile communication system (for example, the 5th generation (5G) communication system).
  • 5G 5th generation
  • the USS or UAV can initiate the positioning process for the UAV.
  • the positioning cycle needs to be updated, the positioning process needs to be re-initiated; in this way, there are many signaling interactions between devices, and the process is relatively cumbersome.
  • the present application provides a communication method, device and equipment to simplify the positioning method.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a communication method. This method can be applied to the communication system shown in FIG. 1 or FIG. 2 below.
  • the method includes:
  • the control plane network element may acquire the location information of the terminal device, where the location information may be used to represent the location and/or moving speed of the terminal device.
  • the control plane network element can send the first location cycle configuration information to the terminal device or the AN device accessed by the terminal device, where the first location cycle configuration information can be used to indicate the location corresponding to the first condition.
  • the first positioning cycle may be used to indicate the location corresponding to the first condition.
  • the control plane network element can send information indicating the first positioning cycle corresponding to the first condition;
  • the positioning cycle is updated by using the location information of the system without re-initiating the positioning process, thereby reducing the interaction between the communication device (for example, terminal device or USS) that initiates the positioning request and the network element of the control plane, and simplifying the positioning process.
  • the communication device for example, terminal device or USS
  • control plane network element may also receive the first information from the first communication device.
  • the first information may include a corresponding relationship between the first condition and the first positioning period.
  • the control plane network element can obtain the corresponding relationship between the first condition and the first positioning period, so as to prepare for determining the positioning information according to the condition.
  • the control plane network element may determine the first positioning cycle configuration information according to the first information and the location information.
  • the control plane network element can determine the first location cycle according to the correspondence between the first condition and the first location cycle, thereby initiating the update of the location information without re-initiating
  • the positioning process can reduce the interaction between the communication device (for example, terminal device or USS) that initiates the positioning request and the control plane network element, and simplify the positioning process.
  • the network element of the control plane may send the second positioning cycle configuration information to the terminal device or the AN device connected to the terminal device.
  • the second positioning cycle configuration information may be used to indicate the second positioning cycle.
  • the control plane network element can provide the terminal device or the AN device connected to the terminal device with the second positioning cycle for positioning, so that the terminal device or the AN device connected to the terminal device can perform positioning accordingly.
  • control plane network element may send information indicating the second positioning period and location information to the second communication device.
  • the control plane network element can be used to update the positioning period
  • the control plane network element feeds back the position information to the second communication device, it will also feed back the second positioning period corresponding to the position information; thus, the second communication device
  • the positioning period corresponding to the location information can be known, so that the movement of the terminal device can be managed more accurately.
  • control plane network element may receive information indicating the second positioning period from the first communication device. Through this design, the control plane network element can easily obtain the second positioning period.
  • the first condition may include at least one of the following:
  • the location of the terminal device is within the range of the first location
  • the location of the terminal device is outside the range of the second location
  • the moving speed of the terminal device is within the first speed range
  • the moving speed of the terminal device is outside the second speed range.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a communication method. This method can be applied to the communication system shown in FIG. 1 or FIG. 2 below.
  • the method includes:
  • the control plane network element may send notification information to the second communication device according to the set movement information and location information.
  • the location information may be used to indicate the location and/or moving speed of the terminal device; the notification information may be used to indicate that the location information deviates from the set movement information.
  • the communication device that initiates the location request does not necessarily need to obtain the location information of the terminal device all the time.
  • the USS does not need to frequently obtain the location information of the UAV.
  • the control plane network element sends the notification information to the second communication device, so as to notify the position information of the terminal device that the position information deviates from the set movement information. shift. In this way, it is not necessary to send the location information to the second communication device every time the location information of the terminal device is acquired, thereby reducing signaling interaction.
  • control plane network element can send notification information to the second communication device according to the set movement information and location information in the following manner: when the offset between the location information and the set movement information is greater than or equal to When the first threshold is reached, the notification information is sent to the second communication device.
  • the control plane network element sends notification information to the second communication device, so that the reported information can be made more effective, and the second communication device can also can be managed more effectively; in addition, When the deviation between the location information and the set movement information reaches a certain threshold, the control plane network element sends notification information to the second communication device, which can further reduce signaling interaction.
  • the control plane network element may also obtain the first threshold.
  • the control plane network element may receive the first threshold from the first communication device.
  • the control plane network element may obtain a preset first threshold. Through this design, the control plane network element can easily obtain the first threshold.
  • control plane network element may obtain the set movement information of the terminal device in the following manner: receiving the set movement information from the first communication device.
  • the network element of the control plane can conveniently obtain the setting movement information.
  • setting the mobile information may include at least one of the following:
  • the set speed range of the terminal equipment is the set speed range of the terminal equipment.
  • control plane network element sends the location information of the terminal device to the second communication device.
  • control plane network element may send the location information of the terminal device to the second communication device in the following implementation manner:
  • Implementation way 1 When the offset between the location information of the terminal device and the set movement information is greater than or equal to a first threshold, the control plane network element sends the location information of the terminal device to the second communication device.
  • the control plane network element when the deviation between the location information of the terminal device and the set movement information is greater than or equal to the first threshold, the control plane network element not only indicates to the second communication device that the location information is relative to the set The notification information of the deviation of the mobile information also sends the location information of the terminal equipment. In this way, the second communication device can effectively manage the movement of the terminal device according to the location information.
  • control plane network element may send the location information of the terminal device to the second communication device according to the first period.
  • the control plane network element sends the location information to the second communication device according to the first period.
  • the second communication device can obtain the location information of the terminal device, thereby avoiding that the second communication device may not be able to receive the terminal device for a long time when simply adopting the first implementation method.
  • the location information of the device so that the second communication device can effectively manage the movement of the terminal device according to the location information.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a communication method. This method can be applied to the communication system shown in FIG. 1 or FIG. 2 below.
  • the method includes:
  • the control plane network element may send the location information of the terminal device to the second communication device according to the first period.
  • the first period is greater than the positioning period of the terminal device.
  • the control plane network element sends location information to the second communication device according to the first cycle that is longer than the positioning cycle of the terminal device.
  • the second communication device can obtain the location information of the terminal device, so that the second communication device can effectively manage the movement of the terminal device according to the location information .
  • the communication device that initiates the location request does not necessarily need to obtain the location information of the terminal device all the time.
  • the network element of the control plane expands the period of reporting location information, thereby reducing the signaling interaction between communication devices.
  • the control plane network element may send notification information to the second communication device according to the set movement information and location information.
  • the location information may be used to indicate the location and/or moving speed of the terminal device; the notification information may be used to indicate that the location information deviates from the set movement information.
  • the communication device that initiates the location request does not necessarily need to obtain the location information of the terminal device all the time.
  • the USS does not need to frequently obtain the location information of the UAV.
  • the control plane network element sends the notification information to the second communication device, so as to notify the position information of the terminal device that there is a deviation from the set movement information. shift. In this way, it is not necessary to send the location information to the second communication device every time the location information of the terminal device is acquired, thereby reducing signaling interaction.
  • control plane network element can send notification information to the second communication device according to the set movement information and location information in the following manner: when the offset between the location information and the set movement information is greater than or equal to When the first threshold is reached, the notification information is sent to the second communication device.
  • the control plane network element sends notification information to the second communication device, so that the reported information can be made more effective, and the second communication device can also Based on this, more effective management can be carried out; in addition, when the offset between the location information and the set movement information reaches a certain threshold, the control plane network element sends notification information to the second communication device, which can further reduce signaling interaction .
  • the control plane network element may also obtain the first threshold.
  • the control plane network element may receive the first threshold from the first communication device.
  • the control plane network element may obtain a preset first threshold. Through this design, the control plane network element can easily obtain the first threshold.
  • control plane network element may obtain the set movement information of the terminal device in the following manner: receiving the set movement information from the first communication device.
  • the network element of the control plane can conveniently obtain the setting movement information.
  • setting the mobile information may include at least one of the following:
  • the set speed range of the terminal equipment is the set speed range of the terminal equipment.
  • the control plane network element when the deviation between the location information of the terminal device and the set movement information is greater than or equal to a first threshold, the control plane network element sends the location information of the terminal device to the second communication device.
  • the control plane network element when the deviation between the location information of the terminal device and the set movement information is greater than or equal to the first threshold, the control plane network element not only indicates to the second communication device that the location information is relative to the set movement information The notification information of the offset occurs, and the location information of the terminal equipment is also sent. In this way, the second communication device can effectively manage the movement of the terminal device according to the location information.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, including a unit for performing each step in any one of the above aspects.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, including at least one processing element and at least one memory A storage element, wherein the at least one storage element is used to store programs and data, and the at least one processing element is used to read and execute the programs and data stored in the storage element, so that the method provided by any one of the above aspects of the present application is implemented.
  • the embodiment of the present application further provides a computer program, which, when the computer program is run on a computer, causes the computer to execute the method provided in any one of the above aspects.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium, in which a computer program is stored, and when the computer program is executed by a computer, the computer is made to execute the method provided in any one of the above aspects.
  • the embodiment of the present application further provides a chip, the chip is used to read a computer program stored in a memory, and execute the method provided in any one of the above aspects.
  • the embodiment of the present application further provides a chip system, where the chip system includes a processor, configured to support a computer device to implement the method provided in any one of the above aspects.
  • the chip system further includes a memory, and the memory is used to store necessary programs and data of the computer device.
  • the system-on-a-chip may consist of chips, or may include chips and other discrete devices.
  • FIG. 1 is an architecture diagram of a communication system provided by an embodiment of the present application
  • FIG. 2 is an architecture diagram of another communication system provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 3 is a flow chart of a method for acquiring location information of a terminal device
  • FIG. 4 is a flow chart of the first communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 5 is a flowchart of a second communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 6 is a flowchart of a third communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 7 is a flowchart of a fourth communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 8 is a flowchart of a fifth communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 9 is a structural diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 10 is a structural diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the present application provides a communication method, device and equipment to simplify the positioning method.
  • the method, device and equipment are based on the same technical conception. Since the principles of solving the problems are similar, the implementation of the device, device and method can be referred to each other, and the repetition will not be repeated.
  • the control plane network element can obtain the location information of the terminal device, where the location information can be used to represent the location and/or moving speed of the terminal device.
  • the control plane network element can send the first location cycle configuration information to the terminal device or the AN device accessed by the terminal device, where the first location cycle configuration information can be used to indicate the location corresponding to the first condition.
  • the first positioning cycle can be used to indicate the location corresponding to the first condition.
  • the control plane network element can send information indicating the first positioning period corresponding to the first condition;
  • the position information of the system updates the positioning cycle without re-initiating the positioning process, thereby reducing the communication equipment (such as terminal equipment or USS) that initiates the positioning request and the control plane.
  • the interaction between network elements simplifies the positioning process.
  • Communication equipment generally refers to equipment with communication functions.
  • the communication device may be, but not limited to, a terminal device, an AN device, an access point, a core network (core network, CN) device, and the like.
  • a terminal device is a device that provides voice and/or data connectivity to users.
  • the terminal equipment may also be called user equipment (user equipment, UE), mobile station (mobile station, MS), mobile terminal (mobile terminal, MT) and so on.
  • the terminal device may be a handheld device with a wireless connection function, a vehicle-mounted device, a roadside unit (roadside unit, RSU) in the Internet of Vehicles communication, a UAV, and the like.
  • examples of some terminal devices are: mobile phone (mobile phone), tablet computer, notebook computer, palmtop computer, mobile internet device (mobile internet device, MID), wearable device, virtual reality (virtual reality, VR) device, enhanced Augmented reality (AR) equipment, wireless terminals in industrial control, wireless terminals in self driving, wireless terminals in remote medical surgery, smart grid Wireless terminals in transportation safety, wireless terminals in smart city, wireless terminals in smart home, etc.
  • the AN device is a device for connecting a terminal device to a wireless network in a mobile communication system.
  • the AN device may also be called a base station, a radio access network (radio access network, RAN) node (or device), and an access point (access point, AP).
  • radio access network radio access network, RAN
  • AP access point
  • AN equipment are: new generation Node B (generation Node B, gNB), transmission reception point (transmission reception point, TRP), evolved Node B (evolved Node B, eNB), wireless network controller (radio network controller, RNC), node B (Node B, NB), base station controller (base station controller, BSC), base transceiver station (base transceiver station, BTS), home base station (for example, home evolved NodeB, or home Node B , HNB), or base band unit (base band unit, BBU), etc.
  • generation Node B generation Node B
  • TRP transmission reception point
  • wireless network controller radio network controller
  • node B Node B, NB
  • base station controller base station controller
  • BTS base transceiver station
  • home base station for example, home evolved NodeB, or home Node B , HNB
  • base band unit base band unit
  • the AN device may include a centralized unit (centralized unit, CU) node and a distributed unit (distributed unit, DU) node.
  • CU centralized unit
  • DU distributed unit
  • This structure separates the protocol layers of the AN device, and the functions of some protocol layers are placed in the CU for centralized control, and the remaining part or all of the functions of the protocol layers are distributed in the DU, and the CU centrally controls the DU.
  • the CN device is a network element included in the CN part of the mobile communication system.
  • the CN device can connect terminal devices to different data networks, and perform services such as billing, mobility management, session management, and user plane forwarding.
  • names of CN devices with the same function may be different.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit the specific name of the CN device with each function.
  • the network element responsible for functions such as access control, security control, and signaling coordination is a mobility management entity (Mobile management entity, MME); the network element serving as the anchor point of local mobile management is the serving gateway (serving gateway, S-GW); as the anchor point of the handover of the external data network, it is responsible for Internet protocol (internet protocol, IP) address allocation
  • MME mobility management entity
  • S-GW serving gateway
  • IP Internet protocol
  • the network element of the packet data network (PDN) gateway (PDN gateway, P-GW); the network element that stores user-related data and subscription data is the home subscription server (home subscriber server, HSS); responsible for policy, plan
  • a network element with a charging function is called a policy and charging control rule function (policy and charging rule function, PCRF) network element.
  • policy and charging control rule function policy and charging rule function
  • the core network can be divided into a control plane (control plane, CP) and a user plane (user plane, UP).
  • control plane control plane
  • user plane user plane
  • network elements responsible for control plane functions in the CN may be collectively referred to as control plane network elements
  • network elements responsible for user plane functions may be collectively referred to as user plane network elements.
  • the network element serving as an interface of the data network and responsible for functions such as user plane data forwarding is a user plane function (user plane function, UPF) network element.
  • UPF user plane function
  • access and mobility management function access and mobility management function
  • AMF access and mobility management function
  • SMF session management function
  • UDM unified data management
  • PCF policy control function
  • application function application function, AF
  • the data network is a network located outside the mobile communication system.
  • the DN may be a packet data network (PDN), such as the Internet (Internet), an IP Multi-media Service (IMS) network, some application-specific data networks, Ethernet, IP
  • PDN packet data network
  • IMS IP Multi-media Service
  • the local network and the like are not limited in this application.
  • a variety of services can be deployed on the DN, which can provide data and/or voice services for terminal equipment.
  • a service flow transmitted in a DN may be called a data flow.
  • nouns as for the number of nouns, unless otherwise specified, it means “singular noun or plural noun", that is, “one or more". "At least one” means one or more, and “plurality” means two or more. "And/or” describes the association relationship of associated objects, indicating that there may be three kinds of relationships, for example, A and/or B may indicate: A exists alone, A and B exist simultaneously, and B exists independently. The character “/" generally indicates that the contextual objects are an "or” relationship. For example, A/B means: A or B. "At least one (individual) of the following" or similar expressions refer to any combination of these items (individuals), including any combination of a single item (individuals) or a plurality of item (individuals).
  • FIG. 1 shows the architecture of a possible communication system to which the communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application is applicable.
  • the communication system includes three parts: terminal equipment (UE is taken as an example in the figure), a mobile communication system and a DN.
  • the mobile communication system provides access service and connection service for terminal equipment.
  • a terminal device is an entity capable of receiving and transmitting wireless signals on the user side.
  • the terminal device can communicate with the AN device through the air interface technology (for example, NR or LTE technology), and needs to access the DN through the mobile communication system where the AN device is located.
  • Terminal devices may also communicate through an air interface technology (for example, NR or LTE technology).
  • the terminal device can serve as a relay device for other data collectors or other terminal devices, so that these devices can communicate with the DN through the mobile communication system.
  • a mobile communication system can access at least one DN, and the same DN can also be accessed by at least one mobile communication system.
  • the mobile communication system may include two parts, AN and CN.
  • the network device deployed in the AN is an AN device, which is specifically responsible for functions such as wireless access, wireless resource management on the air interface side, quality of service (QoS) management, data compression and encryption, and user plane data forwarding.
  • functions such as wireless access, wireless resource management on the air interface side, quality of service (QoS) management, data compression and encryption, and user plane data forwarding.
  • QoS quality of service
  • Network elements deployed in the CN may be collectively referred to as CN equipment.
  • CN equipment Taking the CN in the 5G mobile communication system as an example, the functions of the main network elements in the CN are introduced in detail below. From the above description, it can be seen that the network elements in the CN of the 5G mobile communication system can be divided into two types: control plane network elements and user plane network elements.
  • the user plane network element includes UPF, which is mainly responsible for packet data packet forwarding, QoS control, charging information statistics, etc.
  • UPF can receive packet data packets from DN, and send packet data packets to terminal equipment through AN equipment; UPF can also receive packet data packets from terminal equipment through AN equipment, and forward them to DN.
  • Control plane network elements mainly include: AMF, SMF, PCF, AF, network exposure function (network exposure function, NEF), UDM, authentication server function (authentication server function, AUSF), network slice selection function (network slice selection function, NSSF ), network function (network function, NF) repository function (NRF), unified data repository (unified data repository, UDR), network data analysis function (network data analytics function, NWDAF).
  • AMF is mainly responsible for UE access management and mobility management, for example, responsible for UE state maintenance, UE reachability management, non-mobility management (mobility management, MM) non-access-stratum (non-access-stratum) , NAS) message forwarding, attachment and detachment, and gateway selection.
  • the AMF may provide the session with storage resources on the control plane to store the session identifier and the SMF identifier associated with the session identifier.
  • the SMF is mainly responsible for UE session management, for example, managing the establishment and deletion of PDU sessions, maintaining the PDU session context, selecting user plane network elements, redirecting user plane network elements, Internet protocol (internet protocol, IP) address allocation, and bearer establishment , modification and release, and QoS control.
  • UE session management for example, managing the establishment and deletion of PDU sessions, maintaining the PDU session context, selecting user plane network elements, redirecting user plane network elements, Internet protocol (internet protocol, IP) address allocation, and bearer establishment , modification and release, and QoS control.
  • the PCF is mainly responsible for policy control, for example, providing policy rules on the control plane, and performing charging based on traffic.
  • the AF is mainly responsible for providing various business services.
  • the AF can provide business services by interacting with the core network.
  • business services include assisting in data routing decisions, assisting policy control functions in policy management, and so on.
  • the NEF is mainly responsible for providing the framework, authentication and interface related to the opening of network capabilities, and transferring information between the network functions of the mobile communication system and other network functions (for example, third-party applications).
  • AUSF is mainly responsible for the access certification of communication equipment in the 3rd generation partnership project (3GPP) and non-3GPP networks.
  • the NSSF is mainly responsible for selecting network slices for UE.
  • the NSSF may determine the network slices that the UE is allowed to access according to the UE's slice selection assistance information, subscription information, and the like.
  • the NRF is mainly responsible for the registration and discovery of other network elements, and can provide storage and selection functions for network function entity information for other network elements.
  • the UDM is mainly responsible for the management of user subscription data, for example, the storage and management of the UE identity, and the access authorization information of the UE.
  • the UDR is mainly responsible for storing and obtaining contract data, for example, storing and obtaining policy data for the PCF, storing and obtaining contract data for the UDM, and so on.
  • NWDAF Network Data Analytics Function
  • the MWDAF can acquire network data from other network elements (eg, AF), and can also collect data from operation administration and maintenance (OAM); it can also provide analysis results to other network elements (eg, AF).
  • OAM operation administration and maintenance
  • the communication system may also include communication equipment for LCS.
  • the communication equipment involved in the LCS will be described in detail below with reference to FIG. 2 .
  • the communication system may further include: a positioning server, a location management function (location management function, LMF), a gateway mobile location center (GMLC), and a location retrieval function (location retrieval function, LRF).
  • a positioning server a location management function (location management function, LMF), a gateway mobile location center (GMLC), and a location retrieval function (location retrieval function, LRF).
  • LMF location management function
  • GMLC gateway mobile location center
  • LRF location retrieval function
  • the positioning server may be an LCS client (LCS client) or an AF.
  • the USS can serve as the LCS client or the AF, and send a positioning request for the terminal device to the mobile communication system, so as to obtain the location information of the terminal device.
  • USS can also be replaced by UAV traffic management (UTM).
  • UAV traffic management UAV traffic management
  • the LMF is mainly responsible for managing and controlling the positioning request of the UE.
  • the LMF can send positioning-related auxiliary information to the UE through the LTE positioning protocol (LPP); the LMF can control the positioning measurement through the NR positioning protocol A (NR positioning protocol A, NRPPa) between the LMF and the AN device , for example, to control the uplink measurement performed by the AN device or the downlink measurement performed by the UE.
  • the LMF may also select a positioning scheme of the network.
  • the LMF may select a positioning scheme according to at least one of the following: positioning server, accuracy and delay required by QoS, and positioning capabilities of UE and AN equipment. When multiple positioning schemes are used for mixed positioning, LMF can combine the received results and estimate the position accordingly.
  • the GMLC is mainly responsible for transmitting positioning-related information, such as positioning requests and location information, between the positioning server and network elements on the control plane.
  • the LRF obtains UE-related location information for an external LCS client.
  • LRF can interact with a separate GMLC, and can also be integrated with GMLC to obtain positioning information.
  • some communication devices in the architecture shown in FIG. 1 can also implement functions for the LCS, which will be described below.
  • the NEF can be used to transfer location-related information between the GMLC and the AF, for example, a request for obtaining location information (also referred to as a location request), location information, and the like.
  • NEF can also be UAS NF.
  • UAS NF is a network element that provides services for drones in the 5G mobile communication system, and its function is the same as that of NEF.
  • the AMF can be used to transfer location-related information between the LMF and other communication devices (eg, AN device, UE or GMLC), for example, a request for obtaining location information, location information, location data, etc.
  • other communication devices eg, AN device, UE or GMLC
  • AN devices and UEs can be used to provide positioning data for the LMF.
  • Figures 1 and 2 also show interfaces between multiple network elements in the communication system.
  • N1 is the interface between the UE and the control plane of the core network, and the UE and the AMF can interact through the N1 interface.
  • N2 is an interface between the access network device and the core network control plane, and the access network device and the AMF can interact through the N2 interface.
  • N3 is a communication interface between the access network equipment and the UPF, and is used to transmit user data.
  • N4 is an interface between SMF and UPF, and is used for policy configuration on UPF, etc.
  • N6 is the interface between UPF and DN.
  • N8 is the interface between AMF and UDM.
  • NL1 is the interface between AMF and LMF.
  • NL2 is the interface between AMF and GMLC.
  • NL5 is the interface between NEF and LRF.
  • NL6 is the interface between UDM and GMLC.
  • N33 is the interface between NEF and AF. Interfaces between network elements of the control plane in the CN can be implemented in the form of corresponding service interfaces, as shown in FIG. 1 .
  • the communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application can also be applied to communication systems of various standards, such as: LTE communication system, 5G communication system, sixth generation (The 6th Generation, 6G) communication system and future communication system system, vehicle to everything (V2X), long-term evolution-vehicle networking (LTE-vehicle, LTE-V), vehicle-to-vehicle (vehicle to vehicle, V2V), vehicle networking, machine type communications (Machine Type Communications, MTC), Internet of Things (Internet of Things, IoT), Long Term Evolution-Machine to Machine (LTE-Machine to Machine, LTE-M), Machine to Machine (M2M), Internet of Things, etc.
  • LTE communication system 5G communication system
  • 6G The 6th Generation, 6G communication system and future communication system system
  • V2X vehicle to everything
  • LTE-vehicle networking LTE-vehicle, LTE-V
  • vehicle-to-vehicle vehicle to vehicle, V2V
  • vehicle networking machine type
  • each network element may have other names;
  • the physical device can also have other names.
  • the method may be a mobile terminated location request (mobile terminated location request, MT-LR) method.
  • the LCS client sends an LCS service request (LCS Service Request) to the GMLC to request to obtain the location information of the UE.
  • LCS Service Request LCS service request
  • the LCS service request includes: UE's identity (eg, generic public subscription identity (GPSI) or user permanent identifier (subscription permanent identifier, SUPI)), required QoS (required QoS).
  • UE's identity eg, generic public subscription identity (GPSI) or user permanent identifier (subscription permanent identifier, SUPI)
  • required QoS required QoS
  • the service request may also include information for indicating the LCS client (for example, the identifier of the LCS client).
  • the GMLC sends a get request (Nudm_UECM_Get Request) to the UDM to request to get the address of the AMF currently serving the UE.
  • the acquisition request includes the identifier of the UE.
  • the acquisition request can also be used to acquire an LCS privacy profile (LCS privacy profile) for the LCS client.
  • the acquisition request may also include information used to indicate the LCS client.
  • the GMLC receives a get response (Nudm_UECM_Get Response) from the UDM.
  • the acquisition response includes the address of the AMF currently serving the UE.
  • the obtaining response may further include the LCS privacy configuration file.
  • the LCS privacy configuration file indicates that the LCS client is authorized to obtain the location information of the UE, the GMLC may perform S304.
  • the GMLC sends a location information providing request (Namf_Location_ProvidePositioningInfo Request) to the AMF to request to obtain the location information of the UE.
  • a location information providing request (Namf_Location_ProvidePositioningInfo Request) to the AMF to request to obtain the location information of the UE.
  • the request for providing location information may include the identity of the UE and the required QoS.
  • the AMF may initiate a network-triggered service request (network triggered service request) procedure to establish a signaling connection between the AMF and the UE.
  • a network-triggered service request network triggered service request
  • S305 is an optional step. For example, when the UE is in a connected state, S305 may not be executed.
  • the AMF sends a determine location request (Nlmf_location_DetermineLocation Request) to the LMF to request to acquire the location information of the UE.
  • the determining and positioning request may also include a cell identity (serving cell identity) of the serving cell of the UE.
  • the messages in steps S301, S304 and S307 may also include a positioning period.
  • the LMF initiates a positioning procedure for the UE.
  • the LMF may obtain the positioning data of the UE by interacting with the UE and/or the AN device serving the UE, and calculate the position of the UE according to the positioning data.
  • the LMF may send a positioning period to the AN device serving the UE and/or serving the UE through the AMF.
  • the UE and/or the AN device serving the UE can measure positioning data according to the positioning period, and send the positioning data to the LMF.
  • the LMF can then calculate the location of the UE based on this.
  • the LMF sends a determine location response (Nlmf_location_DetermineLocation Response) to the AMF.
  • the positioning determination response may include: a positioning result.
  • the positioning result may include: location information of the UE and accuracy rate of the location information.
  • the AMF sends a location information providing response (Namf_Location_ProvidePositioningInfo Response) to the GMLC.
  • the location information providing response may include a positioning result.
  • the GMLC sends an LCS service response (LCS Service Response) to the LCS client.
  • LCS Service Response LCS Service Response
  • the LCS service response may include a positioning result.
  • the LCS client in the method shown in FIG. 3 can be replaced by the AF, and the interaction between the LCS client and the GMLC can be replaced by the interaction between the AF and the GMLC through the NEF.
  • the AF may send an LCS service request to the GMLC through the NEF, so as to request to obtain the location information of the UE.
  • the GMLC may send an LCS service response to the AF through the NEF.
  • the UE may also request to acquire the location information of the UE.
  • the UE may send a positioning request to the LMF through the AMF, and the positioning request includes the identity of the UE.
  • the positioning period may also be included in the positioning request.
  • the AMF can obtain the positioning result of the UE; then, the AMF can send the positioning result to the UE.
  • the method shown in Figure 3 has at least one of the following problems:
  • the communication device that initiates the positioning request (for example, the UE, the LCS client as the USS or the AF) includes the positioning cycle in the request for obtaining the location information of the terminal device.
  • the positioning cycle needs to be updated, the communication device that initiates the positioning request needs to re-initiate the positioning request process (that is, the process shown in FIG. 3 ), which results in more signaling interactions between devices and the process is more cumbersome.
  • Scenario 1 When the UE is a UAV, the USS can obtain the scheduled flight path of the UAV before the UAV flies. The USS can periodically locate the UAV through the mobile communication system, so as to obtain the real flight path of the UAV. By comparing the intended flight path with the actual flight path, the USS can determine whether the UAV is following the intended flight path.
  • the speed of the UAV may not be uniform during flight.
  • the position offset obtained by the USS each time is very small, therefore, it is not necessary to use the same positioning cycle as when the UAV is moving at a high speed for positioning.
  • the USS initiates an update of the positioning cycle, it needs to re-initiate the positioning request process, resulting in more signaling interactions between devices.
  • the LMF sends the location information of the UE to the communication device that initiates the positioning request according to the positioning cycle, resulting in more signaling interactions between the devices.
  • the USS does not need to frequently obtain the location information of the UAV.
  • the LMF still sends the location of the UE to the communication device that initiates the positioning request according to the positioning cycle information, it will result in more signaling interactions between devices.
  • An embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, which can be applied to the communication system shown in FIG. 1 or FIG. 2 , and can be used to solve the above problem 1. Referring to the flow chart shown in FIG. 4 , the flow of the method will be described in detail.
  • the control plane network element acquires location information of the terminal device.
  • the location information may be used to represent the location and/or moving speed of the terminal device.
  • control plane network element may be, but not limited to, one of the following: LMF, GMLC, NEF; the terminal device may be, but not limited to, a UAV or an unmanned vehicle.
  • control plane network element may perform S401 in one of the following situations:
  • Scenario 1 The control plane network element receives a request from the second communication device for obtaining the location information of the terminal device.
  • the control plane network element receives a request from the second communication device for obtaining the location information of the terminal device, and the request includes a positioning period. When the positioning period is reached, the control plane network element executes S401.
  • the second communication device may be one of the following: AF, LCS client, terminal device.
  • AF and LCS clients can be used as USS.
  • the request for obtaining the location information of the terminal device may be, but not limited to, at least one of the following: LCS service request, location information provision request, and location determination request.
  • control plane network element obtains the location information of the terminal device in one of the following ways:
  • Method 1 The control plane network element determines the location information of the terminal device according to the received positioning data from the terminal device or the AN device connected to the terminal device.
  • the positioning data may include: a timing advance (time advance, TA) and a direction of arrival (angle of arrival, AoA) of the terminal device.
  • TA time advance
  • AoA direction of arrival
  • the control plane network element can determine the distance between the terminal device and the AN device; through the AoA, the control plane network element can determine the direction of the terminal device relative to the AN device. Then, according to the location of the AN device, the control plane network element can determine the location of the terminal device.
  • the positioning data may include: the TA and AoA of the terminal device at time 1, and the TA and AoA of the terminal device at time 2.
  • the control plane network element can determine the position 1 of the terminal device at time 1 and the position 2 at time 2. Then, the control plane network element may determine that the moving speed of the terminal device is (position 2 - position 1)/(time 2 - time 1). In order to accurately determine the moving speed of the terminal device, the control plane network element may obtain positions at multiple times, and determine the moving speed of the terminal device accordingly.
  • the control plane network element receives the location information of the terminal device from the third communication device.
  • the location information of the terminal device may be determined by the third communication device, and the determination method may refer to method 1, which will not be repeated here.
  • the control plane network element may be a GMLC or NEF
  • the third communication device may be an LMF.
  • the control plane network element when the control plane network element is GMLC, the control plane network element can receive the location information of the terminal equipment from LMF through AMF; when the control plane network element is NEF, the control plane network element can receive through GMLC and AMF in turn from LMF The location information of the terminal device.
  • the control plane network element can determine the location information of the terminal device according to the global positioning system (global positioning system, GPS) information of the terminal device.
  • global positioning system global positioning system, GPS
  • the control plane network element may determine the position indicated by the GPS information of the terminal device as the position of the terminal device.
  • the control plane network element can obtain the GPS information of the terminal device at different times, and determine the moving speed of the terminal device according to the GPS information at different times. For example, the control plane network element may acquire the GPS information 1 of the terminal device at time 3 and the GPS information 2 of the terminal device at time 4. GPS information 1 indicates position 3, and GPS information 2 indicates position 4. The control plane network element may determine that the moving speed of the terminal device is (position 4 - position 3)/(time 4 - time 3). In order to accurately determine the moving speed of the terminal device, the control plane network element may obtain positions at multiple times, and determine the moving speed of the terminal device accordingly.
  • the control plane network element When the location information satisfies the first condition, the control plane network element sends the first location cycle configuration information to the terminal device or the access network AN device connected to the terminal device.
  • the first positioning cycle configuration information may be used to indicate the first positioning cycle corresponding to the first condition, or the first positioning cycle configuration information may be used to indicate the first positioning cycle.
  • the first positioning cycle configuration information may directly indicate the first positioning cycle, for example, the first positioning cycle configuration information is the first positioning cycle (for example, 25ms).
  • the first positioning period configuration information may also indirectly indicate the first positioning period. For example, when the value of the first positioning period configuration information is 1, it indirectly indicates that the first positioning period is 25 ms.
  • the configuration information of the first positioning period may be carried in an existing message or in a new message, which is not limited in this application.
  • control plane network element sends the first positioning cycle configuration information to the terminal device or the AN device connected to the terminal device through the AMF network element.
  • the control plane network element can send information indicating the first positioning cycle corresponding to the first condition;
  • the positioning cycle is updated by using the location information of the system without re-initiating the positioning process, thereby reducing the interaction between the communication device (for example, terminal device or USS) that initiates the positioning request and the network element of the control plane, and simplifying the positioning process.
  • the communication device for example, terminal device or USS
  • the first condition may include, but is not limited to, at least one of the following:
  • Condition 1 the location of the terminal device is within the range of the first location
  • Condition 2 the location of the terminal device is outside the range of the second location
  • Condition 3 the moving speed of the terminal device is within the first speed range
  • Condition 4 the moving speed of the terminal device is outside the second speed range.
  • the first location range may be a geographic range, for example, a first area, or an area whose shortest linear distance from the first area is within the first distance range.
  • a first area is a no-fly area.
  • Another example of the first area is an allowed flight area.
  • the first location range may also be a service range of the communication device.
  • the service range of the communication device falls within the aforementioned geographical range, the first location range may be indicated by the service range of the communication device.
  • the information used to indicate the service scope of the communication device may include at least one of the following: one or more An AN device identity (identity, ID), one or more cell identities (cell identity, cell ID), and one or more tracking area identities (tracking area identity, TAI).
  • first location range and the second location range may be the same or different, and may also partially overlap.
  • first speed range and the second speed range may be the same or different, and may also partially overlap.
  • This method provides a variety of conditions, and by flexibly setting the conditions, the control plane network element can flexibly adjust the positioning period.
  • the above method further includes:
  • the control plane network element receives first information from the first communication device.
  • the first information may include a corresponding relationship between the first condition and the first positioning period.
  • the first communication device may be, but not limited to, one of the following: AMF, NEF, LCS client, and AF.
  • the first communication device is an AMF.
  • the LMF may sequentially receive the first information from the LCS client through the AMF and the GMLC; or, the LMF may sequentially receive the first information from the AF through the AMF, the GMLC and the NEF.
  • the first communication device is a NEF or LCS client.
  • the GMLC can receive the first information from the AF through the NEF.
  • the control plane network element is an NEF
  • the first communication device is an AF
  • the first information may be a message including the correspondence between the first condition and the first positioning cycle (for example, a request for obtaining the location information of the terminal device), or may be an information element in the message.
  • the first information when the first information is an information element, the first information may reuse an information element in an existing message, or may be a new information element in an existing message.
  • the first information may be a table of correspondence between the first condition and the first positioning period, and the table of correspondence may be as shown in Table 1.
  • Table 1 the table of correspondence between the first condition and the first positioning period
  • first information may also include correspondences between other conditions and positioning periods, which is not limited in the present application.
  • S403 can be executed first, and then S401 is executed; S401 can also be executed first, and then S403 can be executed; S401 and S403 can also be executed simultaneously.
  • the above method also includes:
  • control plane network element determines first positioning period configuration information according to the first information and the location information.
  • the first condition is condition 1-1, that is, the first condition is that the location of the terminal device is within the first location range.
  • the control plane network element may select a first location cycle corresponding to the first condition, and generate first location cycle configuration information for indicating the first location cycle.
  • the first condition is condition 1-2, that is, the first condition is that the location of the terminal device is outside the first location range.
  • the control plane network element may select a first location cycle corresponding to the first condition, and generate first location cycle configuration information for indicating the first location cycle.
  • the first condition is condition 2-1, that is, the first condition is that the moving speed of the terminal device is within the first speed range.
  • the control plane network element may select the first positioning cycle corresponding to the first condition, and generate the first positioning cycle configuration information indicating the first positioning cycle .
  • the first condition includes condition 1-1 and condition 2-1, that is, the first condition includes: the location of the terminal device is within the first location range, and the moving speed of the terminal device is within the first speed range.
  • the control plane network element may select the first positioning period corresponding to the first condition, And generate first positioning cycle configuration information for indicating the first positioning cycle.
  • the control plane network element can select a positioning period corresponding to a condition satisfied by the position to perform positioning according to the position of the terminal device.
  • the control plane network element can update the positioning period by itself without re-initiating the positioning process, thereby reducing the communication device (for example, a terminal device or USS) that initiates the positioning request and the control plane network element. Interaction simplifies the positioning process.
  • the above method further includes:
  • the control plane network element sends the second positioning cycle configuration information to the terminal device or the AN device connected to the terminal device, where the second positioning cycle configuration information is used to indicate the second positioning cycle.
  • the second positioning cycle configuration information may directly indicate the second positioning cycle, for example, the second positioning cycle configuration information is the second positioning cycle (for example, 10 ms).
  • the second positioning cycle configuration information may also indirectly indicate the second positioning cycle, for example, when the value of the second positioning cycle configuration information is 2, it indirectly indicates that the second positioning cycle is 10 ms.
  • the configuration information of the second positioning cycle may be carried in an existing message or in a new message, which is not limited in this application.
  • control plane network element sends the second positioning period configuration information to the terminal device or the AN device connected to the terminal device through the AMF network element.
  • control plane network element may obtain the second positioning period in one of the following ways.
  • the control plane network element receives the information indicating the second positioning period from the first communication device.
  • the first communication device may be, but not limited to, one of the following: AMF, NEF, LCS client, and AF.
  • the control plane network element is an LMF
  • the first communication device is an AMF.
  • the LMF may sequentially receive the information indicating the second positioning period from the LCS client through the AMF and the GMLC; or, the LMF may sequentially receive the information indicating the second positioning period from the AF through the AMF, the GMLC and the NEF.
  • the first communication device is a NEF or LCS client.
  • the GMLC may receive the information indicating the second positioning period from the AF through the NEF.
  • the control plane network element is an NEF
  • the first communication device is an AF
  • the second positioning period may be a default positioning period or an initial positioning period.
  • the information used to indicate the second positioning period may directly be the second positioning period, or may indirectly indicate the second positioning period.
  • the information used to indicate the second positioning cycle may be included in an existing message or in a new message.
  • the message may be a request for obtaining the location information of the terminal device (for example, an LCS service request, a request for providing location information, or a request for determining location).
  • the control plane network element receives information indicating at least one positioning period from the first communication device, and selects the smallest period among the at least one positioning period as the second positioning period.
  • the manner in which the control plane network element receives the information indicating at least one positioning period from the first communication device can refer to the manner 1, except that the second positioning period is replaced with at least one positioning period, which will not be repeated here.
  • the information used to indicate at least one positioning cycle may be information used to indicate a correspondence between at least one condition and at least one positioning cycle (for example, the above-mentioned first information).
  • at least one condition may include the first condition
  • at least one positioning cycle may include the first positioning cycle.
  • At least one condition and at least one positioning period may be in a one-to-one relationship, or may be in a many-to-one relationship.
  • the control plane network element determines the second positioning period corresponding to the second condition. That is to say, during the moving process of the terminal device, the network element of the control plane first determines the second positioning period according to the position information 1 of the terminal device; , the first positioning period is determined, so that the positioning period can be updated multiple times.
  • the second condition may include, but is not limited to, at least one of the following:
  • Condition 1 the location of the terminal device is within the range of the third location
  • Condition 2 the location of the terminal device is outside the range of the fourth location
  • Condition 3 the moving speed of the terminal device is within the third speed range
  • Condition 4 The moving speed of the terminal device is outside the fourth speed range.
  • condition 1 For the specific content of condition 1, please refer to condition 1, just replace the first position range with the third position range; for the specific content of condition 2, refer to condition 2, just replace the second position range with the fourth position range;
  • condition 3 just replace the first speed range with the third speed range; for the specific content of condition four, refer to condition 4, just replace the second speed range with the fourth speed range, I won't repeat them here.
  • the third position range is different from the first position range, and/or the fourth position range is different from the second position range, and/or the third speed range is different from the first speed range, and/or the fourth speed range Different from the second speed range.
  • the first location range is the service range of cell 1
  • the third location range is the service range of cell 2
  • both the first speed range and the third speed range are 0-5 kilometers per hour (km/h).
  • both the first location range and the third location range are service areas of the cell 1; the first speed range is 0-5 km/h, and the third speed range is 20-30 km/h.
  • the first location range is the service area of cell 1
  • the third location range is the service area of cell 2
  • the first speed range is 0-5 km/h
  • the third speed range is 20-30 km/h.
  • the second location range is the service range of cell 3
  • the fourth location range is the service range of cell 4; both the second speed range and the fourth speed range are 5-10 km/h.
  • both the second location range and the fourth location range are service areas of the cell 3; the second speed range is 0-5 km/h, and the fourth speed range is 5-10 km/h.
  • the first location range and the third location range are both the service range of cell 1; the second location range and the fourth location range are both the service range of cell 3; the second speed range is 0-5km/h, and the fourth The speed range is 5-10km/h.
  • the control plane network element obtains the pre-configured second positioning period.
  • the control plane network element is pre-configured with a second positioning period, and the second positioning period may be a default positioning period or an initial positioning period.
  • control plane network element determines to use the preconfigured second positioning period, and sends the second positioning period configuration information to the terminal device or the AN device connected to the terminal device.
  • control plane network element can notify the terminal device of the second positioning period, so as to update the positioning period according to the position information obtained through the second positioning period.
  • the above method further includes:
  • the control plane network element sends information for indicating the second positioning period and location information to the second communication device.
  • the second communication device may be one of the following: AF, LCS client, and terminal device.
  • control plane network element may send the second communication device a message for The information indicating the second positioning period and the location information may also be sent to the second communication device through a new message to indicate the information indicating the second positioning period and the location information.
  • S402 can be executed first, and then S406; or S406 can be executed first, and then S402 can be executed; S402 and S406 can also be executed simultaneously.
  • control plane network element when the control plane network element can be used to update the positioning period, when the control plane network element feeds back the position information to the second communication device, it will also feed back the second positioning period corresponding to the position information; thus, the second communication device
  • the positioning period corresponding to the location information can be known, so that the movement of the terminal device can be managed more accurately.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides another communication method, which can be applied to the communication system shown in FIG. 1 or FIG. 2 and can be used to solve the above problem 2. Referring to the flow chart shown in FIG. 5 , the flow of the method will be described in detail.
  • S501 The network element of the control plane acquires the setting movement information of the terminal device.
  • control plane network element may be, but not limited to, one of the following: LMF, GMLC, NEF;
  • the terminal device may be, but not limited to, a UAV or an unmanned vehicle.
  • setting movement information may also be referred to as setting flight information.
  • the control plane network element acquires location information of the terminal device.
  • the location information is used to represent the location and/or moving speed of the terminal device.
  • the present application does not limit the execution order of S501 and S502, S501 may be executed first, and then S502 may be executed; S502 may be executed first, and then S501 may be executed; S501 and S502 may be executed simultaneously.
  • the control plane network element sends notification information to the second communication device according to the set movement information and location information.
  • the notification information may be used to indicate that the location information deviates from the set movement information.
  • the control plane network element may send the notification information to the second communication device to notify the second communication device that the following event occurs: the position information of the terminal device is relatively Deviation occurs in setting mobile information.
  • the location information is offset relative to the set movement information, which can also be understood as the location information is different from the set movement information, or the location information is different from any position information in the set movement information.
  • the second communication device may be one of the following: AF, LCS client, and terminal device.
  • AF and LCS clients can be used as USS.
  • the notification information may be a message for indicating that the location information is offset relative to the set movement information, or may be an information element in the message.
  • the notification information may reuse an information element in an existing message, or may be a new information element in an existing message.
  • the information element may be a first indication field, and when the value of this field is the first value, it may indicate that the location of the terminal device deviates from the set movement information.
  • the information element may be a second indication field, and when the value of this field is the second value, it may indicate that the moving speed of the terminal device deviates from the set moving information.
  • the communication device that initiates the location request does not necessarily need to obtain the location information of the terminal device all the time.
  • the USS does not need to frequently acquire the UAV’s position configuration information.
  • the control plane network element sends the notification information to the second communication device, so as to notify the position information of the terminal device that the position information deviates from the set movement information. shift. In this way, it is not necessary to send the location information to the second communication device every time the location information of the terminal device is acquired, thereby reducing signaling interaction.
  • control plane network element may obtain the set movement information of the terminal device in the following manner: the control plane network element receives the set movement information from the first communication device.
  • the first communication device may be, but not limited to, one of the following: AMF, NEF, LCS client, and AF.
  • the control plane network element is an LMF
  • the first communication device is an AMF.
  • the LMF may sequentially receive the set movement information from the LCS client through the AMF and the GMLC; or, the LMF may sequentially receive the set movement information from the AF through the AMF, the GMLC and the NEF.
  • the first communication device is a NEF or LCS client.
  • the GMLC can receive the set movement information from the AF through the NEF.
  • the control plane network element is an NEF
  • the first communication device is an AF
  • setting the mobile information may reuse information elements in an existing message (for example, a request for obtaining location information of a terminal device), or may be a new information element in an existing message.
  • control plane network element can conveniently obtain the setting movement information.
  • setting the movement information includes at least one of the following:
  • the set moving path of the terminal device for example, a series of trace information or path curve information on the predetermined moving path.
  • the set position of the terminal device at at least one point in time (also referred to as the position that the terminal device should arrive at at least one point in time): for example, the set geographic location of the terminal device at time point 1, at time point 1 Set Geolocation 2 on point 2 etc.
  • the representation form of the set position of the terminal device at at least one time point may be a correspondence table between at least one time point and the set position.
  • the set moving speed of the terminal device can be a fixed value, and the terminal device should always move at the set moving speed during the moving process.
  • the set moving speed may also be a changing value, for example, changing with time, or changing according to the location or location range of the terminal device.
  • setting the moving information may include setting a corresponding relationship between the moving speed and a change amount (for example, time, the location or location range of the terminal device).
  • the set speed range of the terminal device can be a fixed range, and the terminal device should always move at the speed of the set speed range during the moving process.
  • the set speed range may also be a changing value, for example, changing with time, or changing according to the location or location range of the terminal device.
  • setting the movement information may include setting a correspondence between the speed range and the change amount (for example, time, the location of the terminal device or the location range).
  • the method provides a variety of set movement information, so that the network element of the control plane can flexibly judge whether the location information of the terminal device deviates from the set movement information according to the set movement information.
  • control plane network element may send notification information to the second communication device.
  • the second communication device may be one of the following: AF, LCS client, and terminal device.
  • the first threshold may include at least one of the following: a maximum offset value between the position of the terminal device and the set moving path, a maximum offset value between the position of the terminal device and the set position, and a maximum offset value between the position of the terminal device and the set position.
  • control plane network element may send notification information to the second communication device.
  • the location information may indicate the position of the terminal device
  • the first threshold is the maximum offset value between the position of the terminal device and the set movement route. If the shortest distance between the location indicated by the location information and the set moving path is greater than or equal to the first threshold, the control plane network element may send notification information to the second communication device to notify the second communication device that the location of the terminal device is relative to the set path.
  • the fixed mobile information is offset.
  • the position information may indicate the position of the terminal device at the first time point
  • the first threshold is the distance between the position of the terminal device and the set position. The maximum offset value of . If the distance between the position of the terminal device at the first time point and the set position of the terminal device at the first time point is greater than or equal to the first threshold, the control plane network element may send notification information to the second communication device to notify the second communication device The position of the terminal device of the second communication device deviates relative to the set movement information.
  • the location information may represent the moving speed of the terminal device
  • the first threshold value is the difference between the moving speed of the terminal device and the setting value. The maximum offset between movement speeds. If the difference between the moving speed represented by the location information and the set moving speed of the terminal device is greater than or equal to the first threshold, the control plane network element may send notification information to the second communication device to notify the second communication device of the terminal device The movement speed of is offset from the set movement information.
  • the location information may indicate the movement speed of the terminal device in the first time period
  • the first threshold is The maximum offset value between the mobile speed of the terminal device and the set mobile speed. If the difference between the moving speed of the terminal device in the first time period and the set moving speed of the terminal device in the first time period is greater than or equal to the first threshold, the control plane network element may send notification information to the second communication device, Notifying the second communication device that the moving speed of the terminal device deviates from the set moving information.
  • the location information may indicate the movement speed of the terminal device at the first location
  • the first threshold is the terminal The maximum offset between the device's movement speed and the set movement speed. If the difference between the moving speed of the terminal device at the first location and the set moving speed of the terminal device at the first location is greater than or equal to the first threshold, the control plane network element may send notification information to the second communication device to notify The moving speed of the terminal device of the second communication device deviates from the set moving information.
  • the location information may represent the moving speed of the terminal device
  • the first threshold is the moving speed of the terminal device and the setting Maximum offset value between velocity ranges. If the deviation between the moving speed represented by the location information and the set speed range of the terminal device is greater than or equal to the first threshold, the control plane network element may send notification information to the second communication device to notify the second communication device of the terminal device The movement speed of is offset from the set movement information.
  • the location information may indicate the moving speed of the terminal device in the second time period
  • the first threshold is The maximum offset value between the mobile speed of the terminal device and the set speed range. If the deviation between the moving speed of the terminal device in the second time period and the set speed range of the terminal device in the second time period is greater than or equal to the first threshold, the network element on the control plane may report to the second The communication device sends notification information to notify the second communication device that the movement speed of the terminal device deviates from the set movement information.
  • the location information may indicate the moving speed of the terminal device at the second location
  • the first threshold is the terminal The maximum offset between the device's moving speed and the set speed range. If the deviation between the moving speed of the terminal device at the second location and the set speed range of the terminal device at the second location is greater than or equal to the first threshold, the control plane network element may send notification information to the second communication device to notify The moving speed of the terminal device of the second communication device deviates from the set moving information.
  • the location information may represent the position and movement speed of the terminal device;
  • a threshold value includes: the maximum offset value between the position of the terminal device and the set moving path (hereinafter referred to as the first maximum offset value), the maximum offset value between the terminal device's moving speed and the set moving speed ( Hereinafter, it is referred to as the second maximum offset value for short).
  • control plane network element may send notification information to the second communication device to notify the second communication device that the position and moving speed of the terminal device deviate from the set moving information.
  • the above method before sending the notification information to the second communication device, the above method further includes:
  • the control plane network element may obtain the first threshold.
  • the control plane network element may acquire the first threshold from the second communication device.
  • the first threshold may reuse information elements in an existing message (for example, a request for obtaining location information of a terminal device), or may be a new information element in an existing message.
  • the first threshold and the predetermined movement information may be included in the same message, or may be included in different messages.
  • control plane network element may obtain a pre-configured first threshold. That is to say, the first threshold is preconfigured in the network element of the control plane, for example, stored in memory of the network element of the control plane in advance.
  • S501 and S504 can be executed first, and then S502; or S502 can be executed first, and then S501 and S504 can be executed; S501, S502, and S504 can also be executed at the same time; and S501, S504, and S502 can also be executed in the following order.
  • the above method further includes:
  • the control plane network element sends the location information of the terminal device to the second communication device.
  • control plane network element sending the location information of the terminal device to the second communication device.
  • Implementation way 1 When the offset between the location information of the terminal device and the set movement information is greater than or equal to a first threshold, the control plane network element sends the location information of the terminal device to the second communication device.
  • the first implementation mode is described below with an example.
  • the location information may indicate the position of the terminal device
  • the first threshold is the maximum offset value between the position of the terminal device and the set movement route. If the shortest distance between the location indicated by the location information and the set moving route is greater than or equal to the first threshold, the control plane network element may send the location information of the terminal device to the second communication device.
  • the position information may indicate the position of the terminal device at the first time point
  • the first threshold is the distance between the position of the terminal device and the set position. The maximum offset value of . If the distance between the position of the terminal device at the first time point and the set position of the terminal device at the first time point is greater than or equal to the first threshold, the control plane network element may send the position information of the terminal device to the second communication device.
  • the location information may represent the moving speed of the terminal device
  • the first threshold value is the difference between the moving speed of the terminal device and the setting value. The maximum offset between movement speeds. If the difference between the moving speed represented by the location information and the set moving speed of the terminal device is greater than or equal to the first threshold, the control plane network element may send the location information of the terminal device to the second communication device.
  • the location information may indicate the movement speed of the terminal device in the first time period
  • the first threshold is The maximum offset value between the mobile speed of the terminal device and the set mobile speed. If the difference between the moving speed of the terminal device in the first time period and the set moving speed of the terminal device in the first time period is greater than or equal to the first threshold, the control plane network element may send the terminal device's moving speed to the second communication device location information.
  • the location information may indicate the movement speed of the terminal device at the first location
  • the first threshold is the terminal The maximum offset between the device's movement speed and the set movement speed. If the difference between the moving speed of the terminal device at the first location and the set moving speed of the terminal device at the first location is greater than or equal to the first threshold, the control plane network element may send the location information of the terminal device to the second communication device .
  • the location information may represent the moving speed of the terminal device
  • the first threshold is the moving speed of the terminal device and the setting Maximum offset value between velocity ranges. If the deviation between the moving speed represented by the location information and the set speed range of the terminal device is greater than or equal to the first threshold, the control plane network element may send the location information of the terminal device to the second communication device.
  • the location information may indicate the moving speed of the terminal device in the second time period
  • the first threshold is The maximum offset value between the mobile speed of the terminal device and the set speed range. If the deviation between the moving speed of the terminal device in the second time period and the set speed range of the terminal device in the second time period is greater than or equal to the first threshold, the control plane network element may send the terminal device's moving speed to the second communication device location information.
  • the location information may indicate the moving speed of the terminal device at the second location
  • the first threshold is the terminal The maximum offset between the device's moving speed and the set speed range. If the deviation between the moving speed of the terminal device at the second location and the set speed range of the terminal device at the second location is greater than or equal to the first threshold, the control plane network element may send the location information of the terminal device to the second communication device .
  • the location information may represent the position and movement speed of the terminal device;
  • a threshold includes: the maximum offset value between the position of the terminal device and the set moving path (hereinafter referred to as the first maximum offset value), and the maximum offset value between the moving speed of the terminal device and the set moving speed (hereinafter referred to as the second maximum offset value for short).
  • control plane network element may send the location information of the terminal device to the second communication device.
  • control plane network elements can pass existing messages (for example, determine location response, provide location information response, LCS At least one of the service response, the notification message for notifying the positioning result, etc.) sends the location information of the terminal device to the second communication device, or sends the location information of the terminal device to the second communication device through a new message.
  • existing messages for example, determine location response, provide location information response, LCS At least one of the service response, the notification message for notifying the positioning result, etc.
  • this application does not limit the order in which the control plane network element sends the location information and notification information of the terminal device.
  • the control plane network element may send the location information of the terminal device first, and then send the notification information; it may also send the notification information first, and then send the location information; or it may send the location information and the notification information at the same time.
  • the control plane network element when the deviation between the location information of the terminal device and the set movement information is greater than or equal to the first threshold, the control plane network element not only indicates to the second communication device that the location information is relative to the set The notification information of the deviation of the mobile information also sends the location information of the terminal equipment. In this way, the second communication device can effectively manage the movement of the terminal device according to the location information.
  • Implementation mode 2 The control plane network element periodically sends the location information of the terminal device to the second communication device.
  • control plane network element can perform the operations of A1-A2.
  • the control plane network element acquires information indicating the first period.
  • control plane network element may acquire the information indicating the first period in the following manner: the control plane network element receives the information indicating the first period from the first communication device.
  • the first period may indicate a period in which the control plane network element sends the location information of the terminal device.
  • the first period is different from the positioning period of the terminal device, for example, the first period may be greater than the positioning period of the terminal device.
  • the information used to indicate the first period may directly indicate the first period, for example, the information used to indicate the first period is the first period (for example, 200ms).
  • the information for indicating the first period may also indirectly indicate the first period. For example, when the value of the information for indicating the first period is 5, it indirectly indicates that the first period is 200ms.
  • the information used to indicate the first period may be a message used to indicate the first period, or may be an information element in the message.
  • the information used to indicate the first cycle may multiplex an information element in an existing message, or may be a new information element in an existing message.
  • the information element may be a third indication field, and when the value of this field is a third value, it may indicate the first period.
  • the present application does not limit the order in which the network element of the control plane receives the setting movement information of the terminal device (ie S501 ) and the information used to indicate the first cycle.
  • the network element on the control plane may first receive the set movement information of the terminal equipment, and then receive the information indicating the first period; it may also receive the information indicating the first period first, and then receive the set movement information; The setting movement information and the information indicating the first period are received simultaneously.
  • A2 The control plane network element sends the location information of the terminal device to the second communication device according to the first period.
  • the control plane network element sends the location information of the terminal device to the second communication device in a first period.
  • the second positioning period is 10ms
  • the first period is 200ms.
  • the control plane network element acquires the location information of the terminal device through the second positioning period. Assume that the start times of the second positioning period and the first period are both time 0.
  • the control plane network element can obtain 20 pieces of location information of the terminal device in a first period, and send the latest location information to the second communication device at time 0+200ms.
  • control plane network element may send the location information of the terminal device to the second communication device according to the first period and the last time when the location information and/or notification information was sent.
  • control plane network element may reset the timer to zero and start the timer after receiving the information indicating the first period.
  • the control plane network element sends location information and/or notification information to the second communication device (for example, the control plane network element executes S503), the control plane network element resets the timer to zero and restarts the timer.
  • the control plane network element sends the location information of the terminal device to the second communication device.
  • control plane network element may send the second The communication device sends the location information of the terminal device, and may also send the location information of the terminal device to the second communication device through a new message.
  • the control plane network element sends the location information to the second communication device according to the first period.
  • the second communication device can obtain the location information of the terminal device, thereby avoiding that the second communication device may not be able to receive the terminal device for a long time when simply adopting the first implementation method.
  • the location information of the device so that the second communication device can effectively manage the movement of the terminal device according to the location information.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides another communication method, which can be applied to the communication system shown in FIG. 1 or FIG. 2 and can be used to solve the above-mentioned problem 2.
  • FIG. 6 the flow of the method will be described in detail.
  • the control plane network element acquires information used to indicate the first cycle.
  • step A1 of the method shown in FIG. 5 which will not be repeated here.
  • the control plane network element sends the location information of the terminal device to the second communication device according to the first period.
  • the first period is greater than the positioning period of the terminal device.
  • control plane network element sends the location information of the terminal device to the second communication device in a first period.
  • step A2 refer to step A2 in the method shown in FIG. 5 , which will not be repeated here.
  • control plane network element may send the location information of the terminal device to the second communication device according to the first period and the last time when the location information and/or notification information was sent.
  • step A2 in the method shown in FIG. 5 , which will not be repeated here.
  • the control plane network element sends location information to the second communication device according to the first cycle that is longer than the positioning cycle of the terminal device.
  • the second communication device can obtain the location information of the terminal device, so that the second communication device can effectively manage the movement of the terminal device according to the location information .
  • the communication device that initiates the location request does not necessarily need to obtain the location information of the terminal device all the time.
  • the network element of the control plane expands the period of reporting location information, thereby reducing the signaling interaction between communication devices.
  • the method further includes:
  • the network element of the control plane obtains the setting movement information of the terminal device.
  • the control plane network element obtains the location information of the terminal device.
  • the location information is used to represent the location and/or moving speed of the terminal device.
  • the control plane network element sends notification information to the second communication device according to the set movement information and location information.
  • the above method before sending the notification information to the second communication device, the above method further includes:
  • the control plane network element may obtain the first threshold.
  • the above method further includes:
  • control plane network element When the deviation between the location information of the terminal device and the set movement information is greater than or equal to the first threshold, the control plane network element sends the location information of the terminal device to the second communication device.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides another communication method, which can be applied to the communication system shown in FIG. 1 or FIG. 2 .
  • This method shows one possible example of the method shown in FIG. 4 .
  • the method will be described by taking the terminal device as a UAV, the control plane network element as an LMF, and the second communication device as an AF as a USS as an example.
  • S701 The AF sends first information to the NEF.
  • the first information may include a corresponding relationship between at least one positioning period and at least one condition.
  • at least one condition includes the first condition
  • at least one positioning cycle may include the first positioning cycle.
  • any condition includes at least one of the following:
  • Condition A The position of the UAV is within the range of the first predetermined position
  • Condition B the position of the UAV is outside the range of the second predetermined position
  • Condition C the moving speed of the UAV is within the first predetermined speed range
  • Condition D The moving speed of the UAV is outside the second predetermined speed range.
  • the specific content of condition A can refer to the condition 1 in the method shown in Figure 4, but the first position range is replaced with the first predetermined position range;
  • the specific content of condition B can refer to the condition in the method shown in Figure 4 2.
  • the specific content of condition C can refer to condition 3 in the method shown in Figure 4, but replace the first speed range with the first predetermined speed range ;
  • the specific content of condition D can refer to the condition 4 in the method shown in FIG.
  • the first predetermined position range is the first position range
  • the second predetermined position range is the second position range
  • the first predetermined speed range is the first speed range
  • the second predetermined speed range is the second speed range
  • the first predetermined position range is the third position range
  • the second predetermined position range is the fourth position range
  • the first predetermined speed range is the third speed range
  • the second predetermined speed range is the fourth speed range.
  • the first position range is different from the third position range, and/or the second position range is different from the fourth position range, and/or the first speed range is different from the third speed range, and/or the second speed range is different from the fourth speed range
  • the range is different.
  • the first condition is: the position of the UAV is located in the second area, and the second area is an area whose distance from the no-fly zone is greater than or equal to the first distance threshold (in other words, the distance between the position of the UAV and the no-fly zone is greater than or equal to the first distance threshold);
  • the second condition is: the position of the UAV is located in the third area, and the third area is an area less than the first distance threshold with the distance from the no-fly zone (in other words, the position of the UAV and the no-fly zone The distance of the zone is less than the first distance threshold).
  • the positioning period corresponding to the first condition for example, 25ms
  • the second condition for example, 15ms).
  • the closer the UAV is to the no-fly zone the smaller the positioning cycle; when the UAV is close to the no-fly zone, more position information can be obtained with a smaller positioning cycle, so that the UAV can be effectively controlled to prevent the UAV from flying into the no-fly zone .
  • the first condition is: the moving speed of the UAV is in the range of 0-5 km/h; the second condition is: the moving speed of the UAV is in the range of 20-30 km/h.
  • the positioning period corresponding to the first condition is smaller than the positioning period corresponding to the second condition.
  • the AF may also send information indicating the default positioning period (also called the initial positioning period, for details, refer to the second positioning period in the method 1 in the method shown in FIG. 4 ) to the NEF. .
  • the default positioning period also called the initial positioning period, for details, refer to the second positioning period in the method 1 in the method shown in FIG. 4
  • the first information and/or the information used to indicate the default positioning period may be included in a request (for example, an event exposure subscription (NEF_EventExposure_subscribe)) for requesting to obtain the location information of the UAV.
  • a request for example, an event exposure subscription (NEF_EventExposure_subscribe)
  • NEF_EventExposure_subscribe for requesting to obtain the location information of the UAV.
  • S702 The NEF sends first information to the GMLC.
  • the NEF may also send information for indicating a default positioning period to the GMLC.
  • the first information and/or the information used to indicate the default location period may be included in the request for requesting the location information of the UAV (for example, provide a location request (Ngmlc_Location_ProvideLocation Request).
  • the GMLC may also send information for indicating a default positioning period to the AMF.
  • the first information and/or the information used to indicate the default positioning cycle may be included in the request for requesting the location information of the UAV (for example, providing location information request (Namf_Location_ProvidePositioningInfo Request)).
  • S704 The AMF sends the first information to the LMF.
  • the AMF may also send information for indicating a default positioning period to the LMF.
  • the first information and/or the information for indicating the default positioning period may be included in the request for obtaining the location information of the UAV (for example, determine the location request (Nlmf_location_DetermineLocation Request)).
  • the LMF sends information for indicating the second positioning period to the UAV.
  • the second positioning period may be the aforementioned default positioning period.
  • the second positioning period may be the smallest positioning period among the above at least one positioning period.
  • the information for indicating the default positioning period may not be included.
  • the information used to indicate the second positioning period may be carried in the request for requesting to obtain the location information of the UAV (for example, LCS Periodic-Triggered Invoke Request (LCS Periodic-Triggered Invoke Request)).
  • LCS Periodic-Triggered Invoke Request LCS Periodic-Triggered Invoke Request
  • S706 The UAV reports the location information of the UAV to the LMF according to the second positioning cycle; correspondingly, the LMF acquires the location information of the UAV.
  • the position information may represent the position or moving speed of the UAV.
  • the LMF may send information for indicating the positioning period currently used by the UAV to the AF through the GMLC.
  • the information used to indicate the positioning cycle currently used by the UAV may be included in a notification message (for example, Nlmf_Location_Notify) used to notify location information.
  • a notification message for example, Nlmf_Location_Notify
  • the notification message may also include a location result of the UAV.
  • the positioning result may include: the position and/or moving speed of the UAV. In this way, after receiving the positioning result, the AF can judge whether the UAV is flying according to the predetermined flight information (for example, a predetermined flight path), so as to manage the UAV.
  • sequence of steps S706 and S707 is not limited.
  • the LMF determines a first positioning period according to the acquired location information and first information.
  • the LMF may send information indicating the first positioning period (ie, the updated positioning period) to the UAV.
  • Each network element performs positioning according to the first positioning period.
  • S707 can be executed first, and then S708 can be executed; S708 can also be executed first, and then S707 can be executed; S707 and S708 can also be executed by notification.
  • S709 and S710 are optional steps. For example, when the first positioning period and the second positioning period are the same, S709 and S710 may not be performed, and each network element still performs positioning according to the second positioning period.
  • the GMLC may also determine the first positioning period according to the location information and the first information. At this time, in S703 and S704, the GMLC may not send the first information to the LMF through the AMF.
  • the LMF after acquiring the location information of the UAV, the LMF sends the location information of the UAV to the GMLC through the AMF. Then, the GMLC determines the first positioning period by referring to the manner in S708; and sends information indicating the first positioning period to the LMF through the AMF. Then, the LMF can perform subsequent operations in FIG. 7 .
  • the NEF may also determine the first positioning period according to the location information and the first information. At this time, in S702-S704, the NEF may not send the first information to the LMF through the GMLC and the AMF. In S706, after acquiring the location information of the UAV, the LMF sends the location information of the UAV to the NEF through the AMF and the GMLC. Then, the NEF determines the first positioning period by referring to the manner in S708; and sends information for indicating the first positioning period to the LMF through the GMLC and the AMF. Then, the LMF can perform subsequent operations in FIG. 7 .
  • the control plane network element can obtain the corresponding relationship between at least one condition and at least one positioning cycle.
  • the control plane network element can update the positioning cycle without re-initiating positioning. In this way, the interaction between the communication device (for example, the terminal device or USS) that initiates the positioning request and the control plane network element can be reduced, and the positioning process can be simplified.
  • An embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, which can be applied to the communication system shown in FIG. 1 or FIG. 2 .
  • This method shows a possible example of the method shown in FIG. 5 or FIG. 6 .
  • the method will be described by taking the terminal device as a UAV, the control plane network element as a GMLC, and the second communication device as an AF as a USS as an example.
  • S801 The AF sends the set movement information of the UAV to the NEF.
  • the set mobile information may include at least one of the following:
  • the set speed range of the UAV is the set speed range of the UAV.
  • the AF may also send information for indicating the first threshold to the NEF.
  • information for indicating the first threshold For the specific content of the first threshold, reference may be made to the description of S503, which will not be repeated here.
  • setting the movement information and/or the information used to indicate the first threshold may be included in the request (eg, NEF_EventExposure_subscribe) for requesting to obtain the location information of the UAV.
  • the NEF sends the set movement information of the UAV to the GMLC.
  • the NEF may also send information for indicating the first threshold to the GMLC.
  • setting the movement information and/or the information for indicating the first threshold may be included in the request for requesting the location information of the UAV (for example, providing a location request (Ngmlc_Location_ProvideLocation Request).
  • the GMLC sends a request for obtaining the location information of the UAV to the AMF (for example, a request for providing location information (Namf_Location_ProvidePositioningInfo Request)), so as to request to obtain the location information of the UAV.
  • a request for obtaining the location information of the UAV for example, a request for providing location information (Namf_Location_ProvidePositioningInfo Request)
  • the AMF selects the LMF, and sends a request for obtaining the location information of the UAV to the LMF (for example, a determination location request (Nlmf_location_DetermineLocation Request)).
  • the LMF sends a positioning request to the UAV (for example, an LCS Periodic-Triggered Invoke Request (LCS Periodic-Triggered Invoke Request)).
  • a positioning request for example, an LCS Periodic-Triggered Invoke Request (LCS Periodic-Triggered Invoke Request)
  • the messages in steps S801-S805 may include a positioning period.
  • the LMF acquires the location information of the UAV; wherein, the location information of the UAV may represent the location and/or moving speed of the UAV.
  • the LMF sends a location result (location result) to the GMLC, where the location result may include UAV location information.
  • the location result may be included in a location notification message (for example, Nlmf_Location_Notify).
  • the GMLC can send location-related information to the AF through the following two implementation manners.
  • the GMLC may send a communication message (for example, Ngmlc_Location_EventNotify) to the NEF according to the positioning result and the set movement information.
  • a communication message for example, Ngmlc_Location_EventNotify
  • the GMLC can compare the position information in the positioning result with the set movement information, and send a communication message to the NEF when the position information deviates from the set movement information.
  • the notification message may include notification information (also referred to as an event (Event)) for indicating that the location information deviates from the set movement information.
  • Event an event
  • the event can be a position deviation event; when the movement speed of the terminal device deviates from the set movement information, the event can be a speed deviation event .
  • the NEF sends the above notification information to the AF.
  • the AF can determine whether the UAV moves according to the set movement information, for example, whether to fly according to the set flight route.
  • the LMF may also send a communication message to the NEF according to the positioning result and the set movement information.
  • the GMLC may send the setting movement information to the LMF through the AMF.
  • the LMF obtains the location information of the UAV, it can send a communication message to the NEF according to the positioning result and the set movement information. For details, please refer to S808.
  • the NEF may also send a communication message to the AF according to the positioning result and the set movement information.
  • the NEF may not send the setting movement information to the GMLC.
  • the LMF may send the positioning results to the NEF through the AMF and the GMLC in sequence. Then, the NEF may send a communication message to the AF according to the positioning result and the set movement information.
  • the NEF may send a communication message to the AF according to the positioning result and the set movement information. For details, please refer to S808.
  • the communication device that initiates the positioning request does not necessarily need to obtain the location information of the UAV all the time.
  • the USS does not need to frequently acquire the UAV’s position configuration information.
  • the control plane network element sends the notification information to the AF, so as to notify that the position information of the UAV deviates from the set movement information. In this way, the location information of the UAV does not need to be sent to the AF every time the location information of the UAV is acquired, thereby reducing signaling interaction.
  • the GMLC may also receive information for notifying the first cycle.
  • the specific content of the first period reference may be made to step A1 in the method shown in FIG. 5 , which will not be repeated here.
  • the GMLC sets a timer according to the first period, and the timing time of the timer is the first period.
  • the GMLC after the GMLC sends the notification message in S808 to the NEF, it can reset the timer to zero and restart the timer.
  • the notification message may include the latest positioning result (for example, including the latest location information of the UAV).
  • the NEF sends the latest positioning result to the AF.
  • the AF can determine whether the UAV is moving according to the set movement information, for example, whether it is flying according to the set flight path.
  • the LMF may also send the communication message according to the first period.
  • the GMLC may send information for indicating the first period to the LMF through the AMF.
  • the LMF may send a communication message to the NEF according to the first period.
  • the NEF may also send the communication message to the AF according to the first period.
  • the NEF may not send the information for indicating the first cycle to the GMLC.
  • the LMF may send the positioning results to the NEF through the AMF and the GMLC in sequence. Then, the NEF may send a communication message to the AF according to the first period.
  • control plane network element may send location information to the AF according to the first period.
  • AF can also obtain the UAV’s position information, thereby preventing AF from being unable to obtain the UAV for a long time location information, so that AF can effectively manage the movement of UAV according to the location information.
  • the present application also provides a communication device, the structure of which is shown in FIG. 9 , including a communication unit 901 and a processing unit 902 .
  • the communication device 900 can be applied to the NEF in the communication system shown in Figure 1, or to the LMF, GMLC or NEF in the communication system shown in Figure 2, and can realize the communication provided by the above embodiments and examples of this application method.
  • the functions of each unit in the apparatus 900 are introduced below.
  • the communication unit 901 is configured to receive and send data.
  • the communication unit 901 may be realized through a physical interface, a communication module, a communication interface, and an input/output interface.
  • the communication device 900 can be connected with a network cable or cable through the communication unit, and then establish a physical connection with other devices.
  • the communication device 900 is applied to a control plane network element in the embodiment of the present application shown in FIG. 4 or FIG. 7 (eg, the control plane network element in FIG. 4 , or the LMF in FIG. 7 ).
  • a control plane network element in the embodiment of the present application shown in FIG. 4 or FIG. 7 (eg, the control plane network element in FIG. 4 , or the LMF in FIG. 7 ).
  • the specific functions of the processing unit 902 in this embodiment will be introduced below.
  • the processing unit 902 is configured to:
  • the location information is used to indicate the location and/or movement of the terminal device moving speed; when the position information satisfies the first condition, send the first positioning cycle configuration information to the terminal device or the AN device connected to the terminal device through the communication unit 901; wherein, the first positioning The period configuration information is used to indicate the first positioning period corresponding to the first condition.
  • the processing unit 902 is specifically configured to: receive first information from the first communication device through the communication unit 901; wherein the first information includes the first condition and the first positioning period corresponding relationship.
  • the processing unit 902 is specifically configured to: when the location information satisfies a first condition, determine the first positioning cycle configuration information according to the first information and the location information.
  • the processing unit 902 is specifically configured to: before acquiring the location information of the terminal device, send the second positioning period configuration information to the terminal device or the AN device connected to the terminal device through the communication unit 901 , the second positioning period configuration information is used to indicate the second positioning period.
  • the processing unit 902 is specifically configured to: send information indicating the second positioning period and the location information to the second communication device through the communication unit 901 .
  • the processing unit 902 is specifically configured to: use the communication unit 901 to receive information indicating the second positioning period from the first communication device.
  • the first condition includes at least one of the following:
  • the location of the terminal device is within a first location range
  • the location of the terminal device is outside the second location range
  • the moving speed of the terminal device is within a first speed range
  • the moving speed of the terminal device is outside the second speed range.
  • the communication device 900 is applied to the control plane network element in the embodiment of the present application shown in any one of FIG. 5 or FIG. 8 (for example, the control plane network element in FIG. 5 , the network element in FIG. GMLC).
  • the specific functions of the processing unit 902 in this embodiment will be introduced below.
  • the processing unit 902 is configured to:
  • Obtain the set movement information of the terminal device acquire the position information of the terminal device; wherein the position information is used to indicate the position and/or movement speed of the terminal device; according to the set movement information and the position Information, sending notification information to the second communication device through the communication unit 901; wherein the notification information is used to indicate that the location information is offset relative to the set movement information.
  • the processing unit 902 is specifically configured to: when the offset between the position information and the set movement information is greater than or equal to a first threshold, communicate to the second through the communication unit 901 The device sends the notification information.
  • the processing unit 902 is specifically configured to: acquire the first threshold before sending the notification information to the second communication device.
  • the processing unit 902 is specifically configured to: receive the set movement information from the first communication device through the communication unit 901 .
  • the set mobile information includes at least one of the following:
  • the set moving speed of the terminal device
  • the set speed range of the terminal device is the set speed range of the terminal device.
  • the processing unit 902 is specifically configured to: send a message to the second communication device through the communication unit 901 Send the location information of the terminal device.
  • the processing unit 902 is specifically configured to: send a message to the The second communication device sends the location information of the terminal device.
  • the processing unit 902 is specifically configured to: acquire information indicating a first cycle; send the location of the terminal device to the second communication device through the communication unit 901 according to the first cycle information.
  • the communication device 900 is applied to a control plane network element in the embodiment of the present application shown in FIG. 6 or the figure (for example, the control plane network element in FIG. 6 , or the GMLC in FIG. 8 ).
  • the specific functions of the processing unit 902 in this embodiment will be introduced below.
  • the processing unit 902 is configured to:
  • the first period is greater than the positioning period of the terminal device.
  • the processing unit 902 is specifically configured to: obtain set movement information of the terminal device; obtain location information of the terminal device; wherein the location information is used to indicate the location and/or moving speed of the terminal device; according to The set movement information and the position information send notification information to the second communication device through the communication unit 901; wherein the notification information is used to indicate that the position information deviates from the set movement information. shift.
  • the processing unit 902 is specifically configured to: when the offset between the position information and the set movement information is greater than or equal to a first threshold, communicate to the second through the communication unit 901 The device sends the notification information.
  • the processing unit 902 is specifically configured to: acquire the first threshold before sending the notification information to the second communication device.
  • the processing unit 902 is specifically configured to: receive the set movement information from the first communication device through the communication unit 901 .
  • the set mobile information includes at least one of the following:
  • the set moving speed of the terminal device
  • the set speed range of the terminal device is the set speed range of the terminal device.
  • the processing unit 902 is specifically configured to: send the location information of the terminal device to the second communication device through the communication unit 901 .
  • the processing unit 902 is specifically configured to: send a message to the The second communication device sends the location information of the terminal device.
  • each function in each embodiment of the present application Units can be integrated into one processing unit, or physically exist separately, or two or more units can be integrated into one unit.
  • the above-mentioned integrated units can be implemented in the form of hardware or in the form of software functional units.
  • the integrated unit is realized in the form of a software function unit and sold or used as an independent product, it may to be stored in a computer-readable storage medium.
  • the technical solution of the present application is essentially or part of the contribution to the prior art or all or part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product, and the computer software product is stored in a storage medium , including several instructions to make a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) or a processor (processor) execute all or part of the steps of the methods described in the various embodiments of the present application.
  • the aforementioned storage medium includes: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (Read-Only Memory, ROM), random access memory (Random Access Memory, RAM), magnetic disk or optical disk and other various media that can store program codes. .
  • this application also provides a communication device, which can be applied to the NEF in the communication system shown in Figure 1, or the LMF and GMLC in the communication system shown in Figure 2 Or the NEF can implement the communication methods provided in the above embodiments and examples of the present application, and has the functions of the communication device shown in FIG. 9 .
  • the communication device 1000 includes: a communication module 1001 , a processor 1002 and a memory 1003 . Wherein, the communication module 1001, the processor 1002 and the memory 1003 are connected to each other.
  • the communication module 1001 , the processor 1002 and the memory 1003 are connected to each other through a bus 1004 .
  • the bus 1004 may be a peripheral component interconnect standard (peripheral component interconnect, PCI) bus or an extended industry standard architecture (extended industry standard architecture, EISA) bus or the like.
  • PCI peripheral component interconnect
  • EISA extended industry standard architecture
  • the bus can be divided into address bus, data bus, control bus and so on. For ease of representation, only one thick line is used in FIG. 10 , but it does not mean that there is only one bus or one type of bus.
  • the communication module 1001 is used to receive and send data to realize communication interaction with other devices.
  • the communication module 1001 may be realized through a physical interface, a communication module, a communication interface, and an input/output interface.
  • the communication device 1000 is applied to a control plane network element in the embodiment of the present application shown in FIG. 4 or FIG. 7 (eg, the control plane network element in FIG. 4 , or the LMF in FIG. 7 ).
  • the processor 1002 is specifically used for:
  • the location information is used to indicate the location and/or moving speed of the terminal device; when the location information satisfies a first condition, send the terminal device a Or the AN device accessed by the terminal device sends first positioning cycle configuration information; wherein the first positioning cycle configuration information is used to indicate the first positioning cycle corresponding to the first condition.
  • the communication device 1000 is applied to a control plane network element in the embodiment of the present application shown in FIG. 5 or FIG. 8 (eg, the control plane network element in FIG. 5 , or the GMLC in FIG. 8 ).
  • the processor 1002 is specifically used for:
  • Obtain the set movement information of the terminal device acquire the position information of the terminal device; wherein the position information is used to indicate the position and/or movement speed of the terminal device; according to the set movement information and the position Information, sending notification information to the second communication device through the communication module 1001; wherein the notification information is used to indicate that the location information is offset relative to the set movement information.
  • the communication device 1000 is applied to a control plane network element in the embodiment of the present application shown in FIG. 6 or FIG. 8 (eg, the control plane network element in FIG. 6 , or the GMLC in FIG. 8 ).
  • the processor 1002 is specifically used for:
  • the first period is greater than the positioning period of the terminal device.
  • processor 1002 For the specific functions of the processor 1002, please refer to the descriptions in the above embodiments of the application and the communication methods provided in the examples, as well as the specific function description of the communication device 900 in the embodiment of the application shown in FIG. 9 , which will not be repeated here. repeat.
  • the memory 1003 is used to store program instructions and data.
  • the program instructions may include program codes including computer operation instructions.
  • the memory 1003 may include a random access memory (random access memory, RAM), and may also include a non-volatile memory (non-volatile memory), such as at least one disk memory.
  • the processor 1002 executes the program instructions stored in the memory 1003, and uses the data stored in the memory 1003 to implement the above functions, thereby realizing the communication method provided by the above embodiments of the present application.
  • the memory 1003 in FIG. 10 of the present application may be a volatile memory or a non-volatile memory, or may include both volatile and non-volatile memories.
  • the non-volatile memory can be read-only memory (Read-Only Memory, ROM), programmable read-only memory (Programmable ROM, PROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (Erasable PROM, EPROM), electronically programmable Erase Programmable Read-Only Memory (Electrically EPROM, EEPROM) or Flash.
  • the volatile memory can be Random Access Memory (RAM), which acts as external cache memory.
  • RAM Static Random Access Memory
  • SRAM Static Random Access Memory
  • DRAM Dynamic Random Access Memory
  • Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory
  • SDRAM double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • Double Data Rate SDRAM, DDR SDRAM enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • Enhanced SDRAM, ESDRAM synchronous connection dynamic random access memory
  • Synchlink DRAM, SLDRAM Direct Memory Bus Random Access Memory
  • Direct Rambus RAM Direct Rambus RAM
  • an embodiment of the present application further provides a computer program that, when the computer program is run on a computer, causes the computer to execute the communication method provided by the above embodiments.
  • the embodiments of the present application also provide a computer-readable storage medium, in which a computer program is stored.
  • the computer program When the computer program is executed by a computer, the computer executes the communication provided by the above embodiments. method.
  • the storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer.
  • computer-readable media may include RAM, ROM, EEPROM, CD-ROM or other optical disk storage, magnetic disk storage media or other magnetic storage devices, or may be used to carry or store information in the form of instructions or data structures desired program code and any other medium that can be accessed by a computer.
  • the embodiments of the present application further provide a chip, the chip is configured to read a computer program stored in a memory, and implement the communication method provided by the above embodiments.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a chip system
  • the chip system includes a processor, configured to support a computer device to implement the functions involved in the service device, forwarding device, or site device in the above embodiments.
  • the chip system further includes a memory, and the memory is used to store necessary programs and data of the computer device.
  • the system-on-a-chip may consist of chips, or may include chips and other discrete devices.
  • the embodiments of the present application provide a communication method, device, and equipment.
  • the control plane network element can obtain the location information of the terminal equipment, where the location information can be used to indicate the location and location of the terminal equipment. /or movement speed.
  • the control plane network element may send the first location cycle configuration information to the terminal device or the AN device accessed by the terminal device, where the first location cycle configuration information may be used to indicate the location corresponding to the first condition. The first positioning cycle.
  • the control plane network element can send information indicating the first positioning period corresponding to the first condition;
  • the positioning cycle is updated by the location information of the new location information without re-initiating the positioning process, thereby reducing the interaction between the communication device that initiates the positioning request (for example, a terminal device or USS) and the network element of the control plane, and simplifying the positioning process.
  • the communication device that initiates the positioning request for example, a terminal device or USS
  • the embodiments of the present application may be provided as methods, systems, or computer program products. Accordingly, the present application may take the form of an entirely hardware embodiment, an entirely software embodiment, or an embodiment combining software and hardware aspects. Furthermore, the present application may take the form of a computer program product embodied on one or more computer-usable storage media (including but not limited to disk storage, CD-ROM, optical storage, etc.) having computer-usable program code embodied therein.
  • computer-usable storage media including but not limited to disk storage, CD-ROM, optical storage, etc.
  • These computer program instructions may also be stored in a computer-readable memory capable of directing a computer or other programmable data processing apparatus to operate in a specific manner, such that the instructions stored in the computer-readable memory produce an article of manufacture comprising instruction means, the instructions
  • the device realizes the function specified in one or more procedures of the flowchart and/or one or more blocks of the block diagram.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Astronomy & Astrophysics (AREA)
  • Aviation & Aerospace Engineering (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

Disclosed in the present application are a communication method and apparatus, and a device, which are used for simplifying a positioning method. The method comprises: a control plane network element acquiring position information of a terminal device, wherein the position information can be used for representing the position and/or the moving speed of the terminal device; and when the position information meets a first condition, the control plane network element sending first positioning period configuration information to the terminal device or an AN device to which the terminal device is connected, wherein the first positioning period configuration information can indicate a first positioning period corresponding to the first condition. By means of the solution, when position information of a terminal device meets a first condition, a control plane network element can send information for indicating a first positioning period corresponding to the first condition; in this way, the control plane network element can update a positioning period according to the position information of the terminal device, without the need to initiate a positioning process again, such that the interaction between a communication device that initiates a positioning request and the control plane network element can be reduced, thereby simplifying the positioning process.

Description

一种通信方法、装置及设备A communication method, device and equipment
相关申请的交叉引用Cross References to Related Applications
本申请要求在2022年03月03日提交中国专利局、申请号为202210203614.4、申请名称为“一种通信方法、装置及设备”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application claims the priority of the Chinese patent application with the application number 202210203614.4 and the application title "a communication method, device and equipment" submitted to the China Patent Office on March 3, 2022, the entire contents of which are incorporated in this application by reference middle.
技术领域technical field
本申请涉及通信技术领域,尤其涉及一种通信方法、装置及设备。The present application relates to the technical field of communication, and in particular to a communication method, device and equipment.
背景技术Background technique
无人驾驶飞行器(uncrewed aerial vehicle,UAV)简称为无人机,是一种具有自主动力的非载人飞行器,可通过人工操控或自动驾驶执行多种任务。随着UAV研发技术逐渐成熟,制造成本大幅降低,UAV在各个领域得到了广泛应用,例如,农业植保、电力巡检、警用执法、地质勘探、环境监测、森林防火以及影视航拍等领域。Unmanned aerial vehicle (uncrewed aerial vehicle, UAV) referred to as UAV, is a kind of unmanned aerial vehicle with autonomous power, which can perform various tasks through manual control or automatic driving. With the gradual maturity of UAV research and development technology and the significant reduction in manufacturing costs, UAVs have been widely used in various fields, such as agricultural plant protection, power inspection, police law enforcement, geological exploration, environmental monitoring, forest fire prevention, and film and television aerial photography and other fields.
UAV与UAV控制器(UAV controller,UAV-C)共同组成无人空中系统(uncrewed aerial system,UAS)。无人空中系统服务提供商(UAS service supplier,USS)负责UAV的飞行管理。USS可通过移动通信系统(例如,第5代(the 5th generation,5G)通信系统)来对UAV进行飞行管理。UAV and UAV controller (UAV controller, UAV-C) together form an uncrewed aerial system (UAS). The unmanned aerial system service provider (UAS service supplier, USS) is responsible for the flight management of the UAV. The USS can manage the flight of UAV through a mobile communication system (for example, the 5th generation (5G) communication system).
在UAV飞行过程中,USS或UAV可发起针对UAV的定位流程。目前,如果需要更新定位周期,需要重新发起定位流程;这样,设备之间交互的信令较多,流程较为繁琐。During the UAV flight, the USS or UAV can initiate the positioning process for the UAV. At present, if the positioning cycle needs to be updated, the positioning process needs to be re-initiated; in this way, there are many signaling interactions between devices, and the process is relatively cumbersome.
因此,目前需要一种简化的定位方法。Therefore, there is currently a need for a simplified positioning method.
发明内容Contents of the invention
本申请提供一种通信方法、装置及设备,用以简化定位方法。The present application provides a communication method, device and equipment to simplify the positioning method.
第一方面,本申请实施例提供了一种通信方法。该方法可以适用于下文图1或图2所示的通信系统中。该方法包括:In a first aspect, the embodiment of the present application provides a communication method. This method can be applied to the communication system shown in FIG. 1 or FIG. 2 below. The method includes:
控制面网元可获取终端设备的位置信息,其中,该位置信息可用于表示终端设备的位置和/或移动速度。当该位置信息满足第一条件时,控制面网元可向终端设备或终端设备接入的AN设备发送第一定位周期配置信息,其中,第一定位周期配置信息可用于指示第一条件对应的第一定位周期。The control plane network element may acquire the location information of the terminal device, where the location information may be used to represent the location and/or moving speed of the terminal device. When the location information satisfies the first condition, the control plane network element can send the first location cycle configuration information to the terminal device or the AN device accessed by the terminal device, where the first location cycle configuration information can be used to indicate the location corresponding to the first condition. The first positioning cycle.
通过该方法,当终端设备的位置信息满足第一条件时,控制面网元即可发送用于指示与第一条件对应的第一定位周期的信息;这样,控制面网元即可根据终端设备的位置信息对定位周期进行更新,无需重新发起定位流程,从而可以减少发起请求定位的通信设备(例如,终端设备或USS)与控制面网元之间的交互,简化定位流程。With this method, when the location information of the terminal device satisfies the first condition, the control plane network element can send information indicating the first positioning cycle corresponding to the first condition; The positioning cycle is updated by using the location information of the system without re-initiating the positioning process, thereby reducing the interaction between the communication device (for example, terminal device or USS) that initiates the positioning request and the network element of the control plane, and simplifying the positioning process.
在一些可能的设计中,控制面网元还可接收来自第一通信设备的第一信息。其中,第一信息可包含第一条件与第一定位周期的对应关系。通过该设计,控制面网元可获取到第一条件和第一定位周期的对应关系,从而为根据条件确定定位信息做好准备。 In some possible designs, the control plane network element may also receive the first information from the first communication device. Wherein, the first information may include a corresponding relationship between the first condition and the first positioning period. Through this design, the control plane network element can obtain the corresponding relationship between the first condition and the first positioning period, so as to prepare for determining the positioning information according to the condition.
在一些可能的设计中,当位置信息满足第一条件时,控制面网元可根据第一信息和位置信息,确定第一定位周期配置信息。通过该设计,当终端设备的位置信息满足第一条件时,控制面网元可根据第一条件和第一定位周期的对应关系确定第一定位周期,从而发起对定位信息的更新,无需重新发起定位流程,从而可以减少发起请求定位的通信设备(例如,终端设备或USS)与控制面网元之间的交互,简化定位流程。In some possible designs, when the location information satisfies the first condition, the control plane network element may determine the first positioning cycle configuration information according to the first information and the location information. Through this design, when the location information of the terminal device satisfies the first condition, the control plane network element can determine the first location cycle according to the correspondence between the first condition and the first location cycle, thereby initiating the update of the location information without re-initiating The positioning process can reduce the interaction between the communication device (for example, terminal device or USS) that initiates the positioning request and the control plane network element, and simplify the positioning process.
在一些可能的设计中,在获取终端设备的位置信息之前,控制面网元可向终端设备或终端设备接入的AN设备发送第二定位周期配置信息。其中,第二定位周期配置信息可用于指示第二定位周期。通过该设计,控制面网元可为终端设备或终端设备接入的AN设备提供用于定位的第二定位周期,以便终端设备或终端设备接入的AN设备据此进行定位。In some possible designs, before obtaining the location information of the terminal device, the network element of the control plane may send the second positioning cycle configuration information to the terminal device or the AN device connected to the terminal device. Wherein, the second positioning cycle configuration information may be used to indicate the second positioning cycle. With this design, the control plane network element can provide the terminal device or the AN device connected to the terminal device with the second positioning cycle for positioning, so that the terminal device or the AN device connected to the terminal device can perform positioning accordingly.
在一些可能的设计中,控制面网元可向第二通信设备发送用于指示第二定位周期的信息,以及位置信息。通过该设计,当控制面网元可用于更新定位周期时,控制面网元向第二通信设备反馈位置信息时,还会反馈与该位置信息对应的第二定位周期;这样,第二通信设备可以获知位置信息所对应的定位周期,从而可以更准确的对终端设备的移动进行管理。In some possible designs, the control plane network element may send information indicating the second positioning period and location information to the second communication device. Through this design, when the control plane network element can be used to update the positioning period, when the control plane network element feeds back the position information to the second communication device, it will also feed back the second positioning period corresponding to the position information; thus, the second communication device The positioning period corresponding to the location information can be known, so that the movement of the terminal device can be managed more accurately.
在一些可能的设计中,控制面网元可接收来自第一通信设备的用于指示第二定位周期的信息。通过该设计,控制面网元可方便的获取到第二定位周期。In some possible designs, the control plane network element may receive information indicating the second positioning period from the first communication device. Through this design, the control plane network element can easily obtain the second positioning period.
在一些可能的设计中,第一条件可包括以下至少一项:In some possible designs, the first condition may include at least one of the following:
终端设备的位置位于第一位置范围内;The location of the terminal device is within the range of the first location;
终端设备的位置位于第二位置范围外;the location of the terminal device is outside the range of the second location;
终端设备的移动速度位于第一速度范围内;The moving speed of the terminal device is within the first speed range;
终端设备的移动速度位于第二速度范围外。The moving speed of the terminal device is outside the second speed range.
第二方面,本申请实施例提供了一种通信方法。该方法可以适用于下文图1或图2所示的通信系统中。该方法包括:In a second aspect, the embodiment of the present application provides a communication method. This method can be applied to the communication system shown in FIG. 1 or FIG. 2 below. The method includes:
控制面网元在获取终端设备的设定移动信息和位置信息之后,可根据设定移动信息和位置信息,向第二通信设备发送通知信息。其中,位置信息可用于表示终端设备的位置和/或移动速度;通知信息可用于指示位置信息相对于设定移动信息发生偏移。After acquiring the set movement information and location information of the terminal device, the control plane network element may send notification information to the second communication device according to the set movement information and location information. Wherein, the location information may be used to indicate the location and/or moving speed of the terminal device; the notification information may be used to indicate that the location information deviates from the set movement information.
在实际应用中,发起定位请求的通信设备并不一定需要一直获取终端设备的位置信息。如下文场景1所述,当UAV按照预定飞行路径飞行时,USS并不需要频繁获取UAV的位置信息。通过该方法,当终端设备的位置信息相对设定移动信息发生偏移时,控制面网元才向第二通信设备发送该通知信息,以便通知终端设备的位置信息相对于设定移动信息发生偏移。这样,无需每次获取到终端设备的位置信息就向第二通信设备发送位置信息,从而可以减少信令交互。In practical applications, the communication device that initiates the location request does not necessarily need to obtain the location information of the terminal device all the time. As described in Scenario 1 below, when the UAV is flying along a predetermined flight path, the USS does not need to frequently obtain the location information of the UAV. With this method, when the position information of the terminal device deviates from the set movement information, the control plane network element sends the notification information to the second communication device, so as to notify the position information of the terminal device that the position information deviates from the set movement information. shift. In this way, it is not necessary to send the location information to the second communication device every time the location information of the terminal device is acquired, thereby reducing signaling interaction.
在一些可能的设计中,控制面网元可通过如下方式来根据设定移动信息和位置信息,向第二通信设备发送通知信息:当位置信息与设定移动信息之间的偏移大于或等于第一阈值时,向第二通信设备发送通知信息。In some possible designs, the control plane network element can send notification information to the second communication device according to the set movement information and location information in the following manner: when the offset between the location information and the set movement information is greater than or equal to When the first threshold is reached, the notification information is sent to the second communication device.
在终端设备移动过程中,如果位置信息和设定移动信息之间的偏移较小,可能很快就会修正回原来的路线,并不影响终端设备按照设定移动信息移动。通过该设计,当位置信息和设定移动信息之间的偏移达到一定阈值时,控制面网元才向第二通信设备发送通知信息,从而可以使得上报的信息更有效,第二通信设备也可以据此进行更有效的管理;另外, 当位置信息和设定移动信息之间的偏移达到一定阈值时,控制面网元才向第二通信设备发送通知信息,还可以进一步减少信令交互。During the movement of the terminal device, if the deviation between the location information and the set movement information is small, it may be corrected back to the original route soon without affecting the movement of the terminal device according to the set movement information. With this design, when the offset between the location information and the set movement information reaches a certain threshold, the control plane network element sends notification information to the second communication device, so that the reported information can be made more effective, and the second communication device can also can be managed more effectively; in addition, When the deviation between the location information and the set movement information reaches a certain threshold, the control plane network element sends notification information to the second communication device, which can further reduce signaling interaction.
在一些可能的设计中,在向第二通信设备发送通知信息之前,控制面网元还可获取第一阈值。例如,控制面网元可接收来自第一通信设备的第一阈值。又例如,控制面网元可获取预先设置的第一阈值。通过该设计,控制面网元可方便的获取到第一阈值。In some possible designs, before sending the notification information to the second communication device, the control plane network element may also obtain the first threshold. For example, the control plane network element may receive the first threshold from the first communication device. For another example, the control plane network element may obtain a preset first threshold. Through this design, the control plane network element can easily obtain the first threshold.
在一些可能的设计中,控制面网元可通过如下方式来获取终端设备的设定移动信息:接收来自第一通信设备的设定移动信息。通过该设计,控制面网元可方便的获取设定移动信息。In some possible designs, the control plane network element may obtain the set movement information of the terminal device in the following manner: receiving the set movement information from the first communication device. Through this design, the network element of the control plane can conveniently obtain the setting movement information.
在一些可能的设计中,设定移动信息可包括以下至少一项:In some possible designs, setting the mobile information may include at least one of the following:
终端设备的设定移动路径;The set movement path of the terminal equipment;
终端设备在至少一个时间点的设定位置;The set position of the terminal equipment at at least one point in time;
终端设备的设定移动速度;The set moving speed of the terminal equipment;
终端设备的设定速度范围。The set speed range of the terminal equipment.
在一些可能的设计中,控制面网元向第二通信设备发送终端设备的位置信息。In some possible designs, the control plane network element sends the location information of the terminal device to the second communication device.
可选的,控制面网元可通过如下实现方式向第二通信设备发送终端设备的位置信息:Optionally, the control plane network element may send the location information of the terminal device to the second communication device in the following implementation manner:
实现方式一:当终端设备的位置信息与设定移动信息之间的偏移大于或等于第一阈值时,控制面网元向第二通信设备发送终端设备的位置信息。Implementation way 1: When the offset between the location information of the terminal device and the set movement information is greater than or equal to a first threshold, the control plane network element sends the location information of the terminal device to the second communication device.
在该实现方式一中,当终端设备的位置信息与设定移动信息之间的偏移大于或等于第一阈值时,控制面网元不但向第二通信设备用于指示位置信息相对于设定移动信息发生偏移的通知信息,还发送终端设备的位置信息。这样,第二通信设备可根据位置信息对终端设备的移动进行有效管理。In the first implementation, when the deviation between the location information of the terminal device and the set movement information is greater than or equal to the first threshold, the control plane network element not only indicates to the second communication device that the location information is relative to the set The notification information of the deviation of the mobile information also sends the location information of the terminal equipment. In this way, the second communication device can effectively manage the movement of the terminal device according to the location information.
实现方式二:控制面网元在获取用于指示第一周期的信息之后,可根据第一周期向第二通信设备发送终端设备的位置信息。Implementation manner 2: After obtaining the information indicating the first period, the control plane network element may send the location information of the terminal device to the second communication device according to the first period.
在该实现方式二中,控制面网元根据第一周期向第二通信设备发送位置信息。这样,不管终端设备的位置信息相对于设定移动信息是否发生偏移,第二通信设备都可以获得终端设备的位置信息,从而避免单纯采用实现方式一时第二通信设备可能长时间接收不到终端设备的位置信息,进而使得第二通信设备可根据位置信息对终端设备的移动进行有效管理。In the second implementation manner, the control plane network element sends the location information to the second communication device according to the first period. In this way, regardless of whether the location information of the terminal device deviates from the set mobile information, the second communication device can obtain the location information of the terminal device, thereby avoiding that the second communication device may not be able to receive the terminal device for a long time when simply adopting the first implementation method. The location information of the device, so that the second communication device can effectively manage the movement of the terminal device according to the location information.
第三方面,本申请实施例提供了一种通信方法。该方法可以适用于下文图1或图2所示的通信系统中。该方法包括:In a third aspect, the embodiment of the present application provides a communication method. This method can be applied to the communication system shown in FIG. 1 or FIG. 2 below. The method includes:
控制面网元在获取用于指示第一周期的信息之后,可根据第一周期,向第二通信设备发送终端设备的位置信息。其中,第一周期大于终端设备的定位周期。After acquiring the information indicating the first period, the control plane network element may send the location information of the terminal device to the second communication device according to the first period. Wherein, the first period is greater than the positioning period of the terminal device.
通过该方法,控制面网元根据大于终端设备的定位周期的第一周期向第二通信设备发送位置信息。这样,不管终端设备的位置信息相对于设定移动信息是否发生偏移,第二通信设备都可以获得终端设备的位置信息,从而使得第二通信设备可根据位置信息对终端设备的移动进行有效管理。With this method, the control plane network element sends location information to the second communication device according to the first cycle that is longer than the positioning cycle of the terminal device. In this way, regardless of whether the location information of the terminal device deviates from the set movement information, the second communication device can obtain the location information of the terminal device, so that the second communication device can effectively manage the movement of the terminal device according to the location information .
另外,如前所述,发起定位请求的通信设备并不一定需要一直获取终端设备的位置信息。通过该方法,控制面网元扩大上报位置信息的周期,从而可以减少通信设备之间的信令交互。 In addition, as mentioned above, the communication device that initiates the location request does not necessarily need to obtain the location information of the terminal device all the time. Through this method, the network element of the control plane expands the period of reporting location information, thereby reducing the signaling interaction between communication devices.
在一些可能的设计中,控制面网元在获取终端设备的设定移动信息和位置信息之后,可根据设定移动信息和位置信息,向第二通信设备发送通知信息。其中,位置信息可用于表示终端设备的位置和/或移动速度;通知信息可用于指示位置信息相对于设定移动信息发生偏移。In some possible designs, after acquiring the set movement information and location information of the terminal device, the control plane network element may send notification information to the second communication device according to the set movement information and location information. Wherein, the location information may be used to indicate the location and/or moving speed of the terminal device; the notification information may be used to indicate that the location information deviates from the set movement information.
在实际应用中,发起定位请求的通信设备并不一定需要一直获取终端设备的位置信息。如下文场景1所述,当UAV按照预定飞行路径飞行时,USS并不需要频繁获取UAV的位置信息。通过该设计,当终端设备的位置信息相对设定移动信息发生偏移时,控制面网元才向第二通信设备发送该通知信息,以便通知终端设备的位置信息相对于设定移动信息发生偏移。这样,无需每次获取到终端设备的位置信息就向第二通信设备发送位置信息,从而可以减少信令交互。In practical applications, the communication device that initiates the location request does not necessarily need to obtain the location information of the terminal device all the time. As described in Scenario 1 below, when the UAV is flying along a predetermined flight path, the USS does not need to frequently obtain the location information of the UAV. With this design, when the position information of the terminal device deviates from the set movement information, the control plane network element sends the notification information to the second communication device, so as to notify the position information of the terminal device that there is a deviation from the set movement information. shift. In this way, it is not necessary to send the location information to the second communication device every time the location information of the terminal device is acquired, thereby reducing signaling interaction.
在一些可能的设计中,控制面网元可通过如下方式来根据设定移动信息和位置信息,向第二通信设备发送通知信息:当位置信息与设定移动信息之间的偏移大于或等于第一阈值时,向第二通信设备发送通知信息。In some possible designs, the control plane network element can send notification information to the second communication device according to the set movement information and location information in the following manner: when the offset between the location information and the set movement information is greater than or equal to When the first threshold is reached, the notification information is sent to the second communication device.
在终端设备移动过程中,如果位置信息和设定移动信息之间的偏移较小,可能很快就会修正回原来的路线,并不影响终端设备按照设定移动信息移动。通过该设计,当位置信息和设定移动信息之间的偏移达到一定阈值时,控制面网元才向第二通信设备发送通知信息,从而可以使得上报的信息更有效,第二通信设备也可以据此进行更有效的管理;另外,当位置信息和设定移动信息之间的偏移达到一定阈值时,控制面网元才向第二通信设备发送通知信息,还可以进一步减少信令交互。During the movement of the terminal device, if the deviation between the location information and the set movement information is small, it may be corrected back to the original route soon without affecting the movement of the terminal device according to the set movement information. With this design, when the offset between the location information and the set movement information reaches a certain threshold, the control plane network element sends notification information to the second communication device, so that the reported information can be made more effective, and the second communication device can also Based on this, more effective management can be carried out; in addition, when the offset between the location information and the set movement information reaches a certain threshold, the control plane network element sends notification information to the second communication device, which can further reduce signaling interaction .
在一些可能的设计中,在向第二通信设备发送通知信息之前,控制面网元还可获取第一阈值。例如,控制面网元可接收来自第一通信设备的第一阈值。又例如,控制面网元可获取预先设置的第一阈值。通过该设计,控制面网元可方便的获取到第一阈值。In some possible designs, before sending the notification information to the second communication device, the control plane network element may also obtain the first threshold. For example, the control plane network element may receive the first threshold from the first communication device. For another example, the control plane network element may obtain a preset first threshold. Through this design, the control plane network element can easily obtain the first threshold.
在一些可能的设计中,控制面网元可通过如下方式来获取终端设备的设定移动信息:接收来自第一通信设备的设定移动信息。通过该设计,控制面网元可方便的获取设定移动信息。In some possible designs, the control plane network element may obtain the set movement information of the terminal device in the following manner: receiving the set movement information from the first communication device. Through this design, the network element of the control plane can conveniently obtain the setting movement information.
在一些可能的设计中,设定移动信息可包括以下至少一项:In some possible designs, setting the mobile information may include at least one of the following:
终端设备的设定移动路径;The set movement path of the terminal equipment;
终端设备在至少一个时间点的设定位置;The set position of the terminal equipment at at least one point in time;
终端设备的设定移动速度;The set moving speed of the terminal equipment;
终端设备的设定速度范围。The set speed range of the terminal equipment.
在一些可能的设计中,当终端设备的位置信息与设定移动信息之间的偏移大于或等于第一阈值时,控制面网元向第二通信设备发送终端设备的位置信息。In some possible designs, when the deviation between the location information of the terminal device and the set movement information is greater than or equal to a first threshold, the control plane network element sends the location information of the terminal device to the second communication device.
在该设计中,当终端设备的位置信息与设定移动信息之间的偏移大于或等于第一阈值时,控制面网元不但向第二通信设备用于指示位置信息相对于设定移动信息发生偏移的通知信息,还发送终端设备的位置信息。这样,第二通信设备可根据位置信息对终端设备的移动进行有效管理。In this design, when the deviation between the location information of the terminal device and the set movement information is greater than or equal to the first threshold, the control plane network element not only indicates to the second communication device that the location information is relative to the set movement information The notification information of the offset occurs, and the location information of the terminal equipment is also sent. In this way, the second communication device can effectively manage the movement of the terminal device according to the location information.
第四方面,本申请实施例提供了一种通信装置,包括用于执行以上任一方面中各个步骤的单元。In a fourth aspect, the embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, including a unit for performing each step in any one of the above aspects.
第五方面,本申请实施例提供了一种通信设备,包括至少一个处理元件和至少一个存 储元件,其中该至少一个存储元件用于存储程序和数据,该至少一个处理元件用于读取并执行存储元件存储的程序和数据,以使得本申请以上任一方面提供的方法被实现。In a fifth aspect, the embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, including at least one processing element and at least one memory A storage element, wherein the at least one storage element is used to store programs and data, and the at least one processing element is used to read and execute the programs and data stored in the storage element, so that the method provided by any one of the above aspects of the present application is implemented.
第六方面,本申请实施例还提供了一种计算机程序,当计算机程序在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行上述任一方面提供的方法。In a sixth aspect, the embodiment of the present application further provides a computer program, which, when the computer program is run on a computer, causes the computer to execute the method provided in any one of the above aspects.
第七方面,本申请实施例还提供了一种计算机可读存储介质,计算机可读存储介质中存储有计算机程序,当计算机程序被计算机执行时,使得计算机执行上述任一方面提供的方法。In a seventh aspect, the embodiment of the present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium, in which a computer program is stored, and when the computer program is executed by a computer, the computer is made to execute the method provided in any one of the above aspects.
第八方面,本申请实施例还提供了一种芯片,芯片用于读取存储器中存储的计算机程序,执行上述任一方面提供的方法。In an eighth aspect, the embodiment of the present application further provides a chip, the chip is used to read a computer program stored in a memory, and execute the method provided in any one of the above aspects.
第九方面,本申请实施例还提供了一种芯片系统,该芯片系统包括处理器,用于支持计算机装置实现上述任一方面提供的方法。在一种可能的设计中,芯片系统还包括存储器,存储器用于保存该计算机装置必要的程序和数据。该芯片系统可以由芯片构成,也可以包含芯片和其他分立器件。In a ninth aspect, the embodiment of the present application further provides a chip system, where the chip system includes a processor, configured to support a computer device to implement the method provided in any one of the above aspects. In a possible design, the chip system further includes a memory, and the memory is used to store necessary programs and data of the computer device. The system-on-a-chip may consist of chips, or may include chips and other discrete devices.
上述第四方面至第九方面中任一方面可以达到的技术效果可以参照上述第一方面至第四方面中任一方面中任一种可能设计可以达到的技术效果说明,重复之处不予论述。The technical effects that can be achieved by any one of the fourth to ninth aspects above can be described with reference to the technical effects that can be achieved by any possible design of any one of the first to fourth aspects above, and the repetition will not be discussed .
附图说明Description of drawings
图1为本申请实施例提供的一种通信系统的架构图;FIG. 1 is an architecture diagram of a communication system provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图2为本申请实施例提供的另一种通信系统的架构图;FIG. 2 is an architecture diagram of another communication system provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图3为一种获取终端设备的位置信息的方法的流程图;FIG. 3 is a flow chart of a method for acquiring location information of a terminal device;
图4为本申请实施例提供的第一种通信方法的流程图;FIG. 4 is a flow chart of the first communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图5为本申请实施例提供的第二种通信方法的流程图;FIG. 5 is a flowchart of a second communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图6为本申请实施例提供的第三种通信方法的流程图;FIG. 6 is a flowchart of a third communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图7为本申请实施例提供的第四种通信方法的流程图;FIG. 7 is a flowchart of a fourth communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图8为本申请实施例提供的第五种通信方法的流程图;FIG. 8 is a flowchart of a fifth communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图9为本申请实施例提供的一种通信装置的结构图;FIG. 9 is a structural diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图10为本申请实施例提供的一种通信设备的结构图。FIG. 10 is a structural diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
具体实施方式Detailed ways
本申请提供一种通信方法、装置及设备,用以简化定位方法。其中,方法、装置和设备是基于同一技术构思的,由于解决问题的原理相似,因此装置、设备与方法的实施可以相互参见,重复之处不再赘述。The present application provides a communication method, device and equipment to simplify the positioning method. Among them, the method, device and equipment are based on the same technical conception. Since the principles of solving the problems are similar, the implementation of the device, device and method can be referred to each other, and the repetition will not be repeated.
通过本申请实施例提供的方案,控制面网元可获取终端设备的位置信息,其中,该位置信息可用于表示终端设备的位置和/或移动速度。当该位置信息满足第一条件时,控制面网元可向终端设备或终端设备接入的AN设备发送第一定位周期配置信息,其中,第一定位周期配置信息可用于指示第一条件对应的第一定位周期。通过该方案,当终端设备的位置信息满足第一条件时,控制面网元即可发送用于指示与第一条件对应的第一定位周期的信息;这样,控制面网元即可根据终端设备的位置信息对定位周期进行更新,无需重新发起定位流程,从而可以减少发起请求定位的通信设备(例如,终端设备或USS)与控制面 网元之间的交互,简化定位流程。Through the solution provided by the embodiment of the present application, the control plane network element can obtain the location information of the terminal device, where the location information can be used to represent the location and/or moving speed of the terminal device. When the location information satisfies the first condition, the control plane network element can send the first location cycle configuration information to the terminal device or the AN device accessed by the terminal device, where the first location cycle configuration information can be used to indicate the location corresponding to the first condition. The first positioning cycle. Through this solution, when the location information of the terminal device satisfies the first condition, the control plane network element can send information indicating the first positioning period corresponding to the first condition; The position information of the system updates the positioning cycle without re-initiating the positioning process, thereby reducing the communication equipment (such as terminal equipment or USS) that initiates the positioning request and the control plane. The interaction between network elements simplifies the positioning process.
以下,对本申请实施例中的部分用语进行解释说明,以便于本领域技术人员理解。In the following, some terms used in the embodiments of the present application are explained, so as to facilitate the understanding of those skilled in the art.
1)、通信设备,泛指具有通信功能的设备。示例性的,所述通信设备可以但不限于为终端设备、AN设备、接入点、核心网(core network,CN)设备等。1) Communication equipment, generally refers to equipment with communication functions. Exemplarily, the communication device may be, but not limited to, a terminal device, an AN device, an access point, a core network (core network, CN) device, and the like.
2)、终端设备,是一种向用户提供语音和/或数据连通性的设备。终端设备又可以称为用户设备(user equipment,UE)、移动台(mobile station,MS)、移动终端(mobile terminal,MT)等。2) A terminal device is a device that provides voice and/or data connectivity to users. The terminal equipment may also be called user equipment (user equipment, UE), mobile station (mobile station, MS), mobile terminal (mobile terminal, MT) and so on.
例如,终端设备可以为具有无线连接功能的手持式设备、车载设备、车联网通信中的路边单元(road side unit,RSU)、UAV等。目前,一些终端设备的举例为:手机(mobile phone)、平板电脑、笔记本电脑、掌上电脑、移动互联网设备(mobile internet device,MID)、可穿戴设备,虚拟现实(virtual reality,VR)设备、增强现实(augmented reality,AR)设备、工业控制(industrial control)中的无线终端、无人驾驶(self driving)中的无线终端、远程手术(remote medical surgery)中的无线终端、智能电网(smart grid)中的无线终端、运输安全(transportation safety)中的无线终端、智慧城市(smart city)中的无线终端、智慧家庭(smart home)中的无线终端等。For example, the terminal device may be a handheld device with a wireless connection function, a vehicle-mounted device, a roadside unit (roadside unit, RSU) in the Internet of Vehicles communication, a UAV, and the like. At present, examples of some terminal devices are: mobile phone (mobile phone), tablet computer, notebook computer, palmtop computer, mobile internet device (mobile internet device, MID), wearable device, virtual reality (virtual reality, VR) device, enhanced Augmented reality (AR) equipment, wireless terminals in industrial control, wireless terminals in self driving, wireless terminals in remote medical surgery, smart grid Wireless terminals in transportation safety, wireless terminals in smart city, wireless terminals in smart home, etc.
3)、AN设备,是移动通信系统中将终端设备接入到无线网络的设备。AN设备作为无线接入网中的节点,还可以称为基站、无线接入网(radio access network,RAN)节点(或设备)、接入点(access point,AP)。3) The AN device is a device for connecting a terminal device to a wireless network in a mobile communication system. As a node in the radio access network, the AN device may also be called a base station, a radio access network (radio access network, RAN) node (or device), and an access point (access point, AP).
目前,一些AN设备的举例为:新一代节点B(generation Node B,gNB)、传输接收点(transmission reception point,TRP)、演进型节点B(evolved Node B,eNB)、无线网络控制器(radio network controller,RNC)、节点B(Node B,NB)、基站控制器(base station controller,BSC)、基站收发台(base transceiver station,BTS)、家庭基站(例如,home evolved NodeB,或home Node B,HNB),或基带单元(base band unit,BBU)等。At present, some examples of AN equipment are: new generation Node B (generation Node B, gNB), transmission reception point (transmission reception point, TRP), evolved Node B (evolved Node B, eNB), wireless network controller (radio network controller, RNC), node B (Node B, NB), base station controller (base station controller, BSC), base transceiver station (base transceiver station, BTS), home base station (for example, home evolved NodeB, or home Node B , HNB), or base band unit (base band unit, BBU), etc.
另外,在一种网络结构中,所述AN设备可以包括集中单元(centralized unit,CU)节点和分布单元(distributed unit,DU)节点。这种结构将AN设备的协议层拆分开,部分协议层的功能放在CU集中控制,剩下部分或全部协议层的功能分布在DU中,由CU集中控制DU。In addition, in a network structure, the AN device may include a centralized unit (centralized unit, CU) node and a distributed unit (distributed unit, DU) node. This structure separates the protocol layers of the AN device, and the functions of some protocol layers are placed in the CU for centralized control, and the remaining part or all of the functions of the protocol layers are distributed in the DU, and the CU centrally controls the DU.
4)、CN设备,是移动通信系统中CN部分中包含的网元。CN设备能够将终端设备接入到不同的数据网络,以及进行计费、移动性管理、会话管理、用户面转发等业务。在不同制式的移动通信系统中,具有相同功能的CN设备的名称可以存在差异。然而,本申请实施例不限定具有每个功能的CN设备的具体名称。4) The CN device is a network element included in the CN part of the mobile communication system. The CN device can connect terminal devices to different data networks, and perform services such as billing, mobility management, session management, and user plane forwarding. In mobile communication systems of different standards, names of CN devices with the same function may be different. However, the embodiment of the present application does not limit the specific name of the CN device with each function.
例如,在第4代(4th generation,4G)移动通信系统(即长期演进(long term evolution,LTE)中,负责接入控制、安全控制和信令协调等功能的网元为移动性管理实体(Mobile management entity,MME);作为本地移动管理锚点的网元为服务网关(serving gateway,S-GW);作为外部数据网络的切换的锚点、负责因特网协议(internet protocol,IP)地址分配的网元为分组数据网络(packet data network,PDN)网关(PDN gateway,P-GW);存储用户相关数据和签约数据的网元为归属签约服务器(home subscriber server,HSS);负责策略、计费功能的网元称为策略与计费控制规则功能(policy and charging rule function,PCRF)网元。For example, in the 4th generation ( 4th generation, 4G) mobile communication system (ie, long term evolution (LTE), the network element responsible for functions such as access control, security control, and signaling coordination is a mobility management entity (Mobile management entity, MME); the network element serving as the anchor point of local mobile management is the serving gateway (serving gateway, S-GW); as the anchor point of the handover of the external data network, it is responsible for Internet protocol (internet protocol, IP) address allocation The network element of the packet data network (PDN) gateway (PDN gateway, P-GW); the network element that stores user-related data and subscription data is the home subscription server (home subscriber server, HSS); responsible for policy, plan A network element with a charging function is called a policy and charging control rule function (policy and charging rule function, PCRF) network element.
又例如,在第5代(5th generation,5G)移动通信系统中,按照具体的逻辑功能划分, 核心网可以分为控制面(control plane,CP)和用户面(user plane,UP)。其中,CN中负责控制面功能的网元可以统称为控制面网元,负责用户面功能的网元可以统称为用户面网元。具体的,在用户面,作为数据网络的接口、负责用户面数据转发等功能的网元为用户面功能(user plane function,UPF)网元。在控制面中,负责接入控制、移动性管理功能的网元称为接入和移动性管理功能(access and mobility management function,AMF)网元;负责会话管理、控制策略的执行的网元称为会话管理功能(session management function,SMF)网元;负责管理签约数据、用户接入授权等功能的网元称为统一数据管理(unified data management,UDM)网元;负责计费、策略控制功能的网元称为策略控制功能(Policy and charging function,PCF)网元;负责传输应用侧对网络侧的需求的应用功能(application function,AF)网元。For another example, in the 5th generation (5 th generation, 5G) mobile communication system, according to the specific logical function division, The core network can be divided into a control plane (control plane, CP) and a user plane (user plane, UP). Wherein, network elements responsible for control plane functions in the CN may be collectively referred to as control plane network elements, and network elements responsible for user plane functions may be collectively referred to as user plane network elements. Specifically, on the user plane, the network element serving as an interface of the data network and responsible for functions such as user plane data forwarding is a user plane function (user plane function, UPF) network element. In the control plane, network elements responsible for access control and mobility management functions are called access and mobility management function (access and mobility management function, AMF) network elements; network elements responsible for session management and control policy execution are called It is a session management function (session management function, SMF) network element; the network element responsible for managing subscription data, user access authorization and other functions is called a unified data management (unified data management, UDM) network element; responsible for billing, policy control functions The network element is called a policy control function (Policy and charging function, PCF) network element; an application function (application function, AF) network element is responsible for transmitting the requirements of the application side to the network side.
5)、数据网络(data network,DN),是位于移动通信系统之外的网络。例如,所述DN可以是分组数据网络(packet data network,PDN),如因特网(Internet)、IP多媒体业务(IP Multi-media Service,IMS)网络、某些应用专用的数据网络、以太网、IP本地网络等,本申请对此不作限定。DN上可部署多种业务,可为终端设备提供数据和/或语音等服务。5) The data network (data network, DN) is a network located outside the mobile communication system. For example, the DN may be a packet data network (PDN), such as the Internet (Internet), an IP Multi-media Service (IMS) network, some application-specific data networks, Ethernet, IP The local network and the like are not limited in this application. A variety of services can be deployed on the DN, which can provide data and/or voice services for terminal equipment.
DN中传输的业务流可称为数据流。A service flow transmitted in a DN may be called a data flow.
本申请实施例中,对于名词的数目,除非特别说明,表示“单数名词或复数名词”,即“一个或多个”。“至少一个”是指一个或者多个,“多个”是指两个或两个以上。“和/或”描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B这三种情况。字符“/”一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。例如,A/B,表示:A或B。“以下至少一项(个)”或其类似表达,是指这些项(个)中的任意组合,包括单项(个)或复数项(个)的任意组合。In the embodiments of the present application, as for the number of nouns, unless otherwise specified, it means "singular noun or plural noun", that is, "one or more". "At least one" means one or more, and "plurality" means two or more. "And/or" describes the association relationship of associated objects, indicating that there may be three kinds of relationships, for example, A and/or B may indicate: A exists alone, A and B exist simultaneously, and B exists independently. The character "/" generally indicates that the contextual objects are an "or" relationship. For example, A/B means: A or B. "At least one (individual) of the following" or similar expressions refer to any combination of these items (individuals), including any combination of a single item (individuals) or a plurality of item (individuals).
另外,需要理解的是,在本申请的描述中,“第一”、“第二”等词汇,仅用于区分描述的目的,而不应理解为指示或暗示相对重要性,也不应理解为指示或暗示顺序。In addition, it should be understood that in the description of this application, words such as "first" and "second" are only used to distinguish the purpose of description, and should not be interpreted as indicating or implying relative importance, nor should they be understood as To indicate or imply an order.
另外,本申请实施例中的“大于”可以被替换成“大于或等于”,“小于或等于”可以被替换为“小于”。In addition, "greater than" in the embodiments of the present application may be replaced with "greater than or equal to", and "less than or equal to" may be replaced with "less than".
下面将结合附图,对本申请实施例应用的通信系统进行描述。The communication system applied in the embodiment of the present application will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings.
图1示出了本申请实施例提供的通信方法适用的一种可能的通信系统的架构。如图1所示,所述通信系统包括三部分:终端设备(图中以UE为例说明)、移动通信系统和DN。其中,所述移动通信系统为终端设备提供接入服务和连接服务。FIG. 1 shows the architecture of a possible communication system to which the communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application is applicable. As shown in FIG. 1 , the communication system includes three parts: terminal equipment (UE is taken as an example in the figure), a mobile communication system and a DN. Wherein, the mobile communication system provides access service and connection service for terminal equipment.
终端设备为用户侧能够接收和发射无线信号的实体。终端设备可以通过空口技术(例如,NR或LTE技术)与AN设备进行通信,需要通过AN设备所在的移动通信系统访问DN。终端设备之间也可以通过空口技术(例如,NR或LTE技术)进行通信。可选的,终端设备可以作为其他数据采集器或其他终端设备的中继设备,从而使这些设备能够通过移动通信系统与DN进行业务通信。A terminal device is an entity capable of receiving and transmitting wireless signals on the user side. The terminal device can communicate with the AN device through the air interface technology (for example, NR or LTE technology), and needs to access the DN through the mobile communication system where the AN device is located. Terminal devices may also communicate through an air interface technology (for example, NR or LTE technology). Optionally, the terminal device can serve as a relay device for other data collectors or other terminal devices, so that these devices can communicate with the DN through the mobile communication system.
移动通信系统可以接入至少一个DN,同一个DN也可以被至少一个移动通信系统接入。其中,所述移动通信系统可包括AN和CN两部分。A mobile communication system can access at least one DN, and the same DN can also be accessed by at least one mobile communication system. Wherein, the mobile communication system may include two parts, AN and CN.
部署在AN中的网络设备为AN设备,具体可以负责无线接入、空口侧的无线资源管理、服务质量(quality of service,QoS)管理、数据压缩和加密、用户面数据转发等功能。 The network device deployed in the AN is an AN device, which is specifically responsible for functions such as wireless access, wireless resource management on the air interface side, quality of service (QoS) management, data compression and encryption, and user plane data forwarding.
部署在CN中的网元可以统称为CN设备。下面以5G移动通信系统中的CN为例,对CN中的主要网元的功能进行具体介绍。通过以上描述可知,5G移动通信系统的CN中的网元可以分为控制面网元和用户面网元两类。Network elements deployed in the CN may be collectively referred to as CN equipment. Taking the CN in the 5G mobile communication system as an example, the functions of the main network elements in the CN are introduced in detail below. From the above description, it can be seen that the network elements in the CN of the 5G mobile communication system can be divided into two types: control plane network elements and user plane network elements.
用户面网元包括UPF,主要负责分组数据包转发、QoS控制、计费信息统计等。例如,UPF可以从DN接收分组数据包,通过AN设向终端设备发送分组数据包;UPF还可以通过AN设备接收来自终端设备的分组数据包,并将其转发至DN。The user plane network element includes UPF, which is mainly responsible for packet data packet forwarding, QoS control, charging information statistics, etc. For example, UPF can receive packet data packets from DN, and send packet data packets to terminal equipment through AN equipment; UPF can also receive packet data packets from terminal equipment through AN equipment, and forward them to DN.
控制面网元主要负责业务流程交互、向用户面下发数据包转发策略、QoS控制策略等。控制面网元主要包括:AMF、SMF、PCF、AF、网络暴露功能(network exposure function,NEF)、UDM、认证服务器功能(authentication server function,AUSF)、网络切片选择功能(network slice selection function,NSSF)、网络功能仓储功能(network function(网络功能,NF)repository function,NRF)、统一数据存储库(unified data repository,UDR)、网络数据分析功能(network data analytics function,NWDAF)。The network elements of the control plane are mainly responsible for service process interaction, delivering data packet forwarding policies and QoS control policies to the user plane. Control plane network elements mainly include: AMF, SMF, PCF, AF, network exposure function (network exposure function, NEF), UDM, authentication server function (authentication server function, AUSF), network slice selection function (network slice selection function, NSSF ), network function (network function, NF) repository function (NRF), unified data repository (unified data repository, UDR), network data analysis function (network data analytics function, NWDAF).
其中,AMF主要负责UE的接入管理和移动性管理,例如,负责UE的状态维护、UE的可达性管理、非移动性管理(mobility management,MM)非接入层(non-access-stratum,NAS)消息的转发、附着和去附着以及网关选择等。另外,当AMF为UE中的会话提供服务时,AMF可为该会话提供控制面的存储资源,以存储会话标识以及与会话标识关联的SMF标识等。Among them, AMF is mainly responsible for UE access management and mobility management, for example, responsible for UE state maintenance, UE reachability management, non-mobility management (mobility management, MM) non-access-stratum (non-access-stratum) , NAS) message forwarding, attachment and detachment, and gateway selection. In addition, when the AMF provides services for a session in the UE, the AMF may provide the session with storage resources on the control plane to store the session identifier and the SMF identifier associated with the session identifier.
SMF主要负责UE的会话管理,例如,管理PDU会话的建立和删除,维护PDU会话上下文,选择用户面网元,用户面网元重定向,因特网协议(internet protocol,IP)地址分配,承载的建立、修改和释放,以及QoS控制等。The SMF is mainly responsible for UE session management, for example, managing the establishment and deletion of PDU sessions, maintaining the PDU session context, selecting user plane network elements, redirecting user plane network elements, Internet protocol (internet protocol, IP) address allocation, and bearer establishment , modification and release, and QoS control.
PCF主要负责策略控制,例如,提供控制面的策略规则,以及基于流量进行计费等。The PCF is mainly responsible for policy control, for example, providing policy rules on the control plane, and performing charging based on traffic.
AF主要负责提供各种业务服务。具体的,AF可通过与核心网进行交互来提供业务服务。例如,业务服务包括协助进行数据路由决策、协助策略控制功能进行策略管理等。AF is mainly responsible for providing various business services. Specifically, the AF can provide business services by interacting with the core network. For example, business services include assisting in data routing decisions, assisting policy control functions in policy management, and so on.
NEF主要负责提供网络能力开放相关的框架、鉴权和接口,在移动通信系统的网络功能和其他网络功能(例如,第三方应用)之间传递信息。The NEF is mainly responsible for providing the framework, authentication and interface related to the opening of network capabilities, and transferring information between the network functions of the mobile communication system and other network functions (for example, third-party applications).
AUSF主要负责第三代伙伴计划(the 3rd generation partnership project,3GPP)和非3GPP网络中通信设备的接入认证。AUSF is mainly responsible for the access certification of communication equipment in the 3rd generation partnership project (3GPP) and non-3GPP networks.
NSSF主要负责为UE选择网络切片。例如,NSSF可根据UE的切片选择辅助信息、签约信息等,确定UE允许接入的网络切片。NSSF is mainly responsible for selecting network slices for UE. For example, the NSSF may determine the network slices that the UE is allowed to access according to the UE's slice selection assistance information, subscription information, and the like.
NRF主要负责其他网元的注册和发现,可为其他网元提供网络功能实体信息的存储功能和选择功能。The NRF is mainly responsible for the registration and discovery of other network elements, and can provide storage and selection functions for network function entity information for other network elements.
UDM主要负责用户签约数据的管理,例如,UE标识的存储和管理,以及UE的接入授权信息等。The UDM is mainly responsible for the management of user subscription data, for example, the storage and management of the UE identity, and the access authorization information of the UE.
UDR主要负责提供存储和获取签约数据,例如,为PCF存储和获取策略数据,为UDM存储和获取签约数据等。The UDR is mainly responsible for storing and obtaining contract data, for example, storing and obtaining policy data for the PCF, storing and obtaining contract data for the UDM, and so on.
网络数据分析功能(Network Data Analytics Function,NWDAF)主要负责对网络数据进行分析。例如,MWDAF可从其他网元(例如,AF)获取网络数据,也可以从操作维护管理(operation administration and maintenance,OAM)采集数据;还可向其他网元(例如,AF)提供分析结果。 Network Data Analytics Function (NWDAF) is mainly responsible for analyzing network data. For example, the MWDAF can acquire network data from other network elements (eg, AF), and can also collect data from operation administration and maintenance (OAM); it can also provide analysis results to other network elements (eg, AF).
在实现位置定位业务(LoCation Services,LCS)时,在图1所示架构的基础上,通信系统还可以包括用于LCS的通信设备。下面结合图2,对LCS涉及的通信设备进行具体说明。When implementing location positioning services (LoCation Services, LCS), on the basis of the architecture shown in Figure 1, the communication system may also include communication equipment for LCS. The communication equipment involved in the LCS will be described in detail below with reference to FIG. 2 .
所述通信系统还可包括:定位服务器、位置管理功能(location management function,LMF)、网关移动定位中心(gateway mobile location center,GMLC)、位置获取功能(location retrieval function,LRF)。The communication system may further include: a positioning server, a location management function (location management function, LMF), a gateway mobile location center (GMLC), and a location retrieval function (location retrieval function, LRF).
其中,定位服务器可以为LCS客户端(LCS client)或AF。在本申请中,USS可以作为LCS客户端或AF,向移动通信系统发送针对终端设备的定位请求,从而获得终端设备的位置信息。在本申请中,USS还可以替换为无人机交通管理(UAV traffic management,UTM)。Wherein, the positioning server may be an LCS client (LCS client) or an AF. In this application, the USS can serve as the LCS client or the AF, and send a positioning request for the terminal device to the mobile communication system, so as to obtain the location information of the terminal device. In this application, USS can also be replaced by UAV traffic management (UTM).
LMF主要负责对UE的定位请求进行管理和控制。具体的,LMF可通过LTE定位协议(LTE positioning protocol,LPP)向UE发送定位相关的辅助信息;LMF可通过与AN设备之间的NR定位协议A(NR positioning protocol A,NRPPa)来控制定位测量,例如,控制AN设备进行的上行测量或UE进行的下行测量。另外,LMF还可选择网络的定位方案,例如,LMF可根据以下至少一项来选择定位方案:定位服务器、QoS要求的精度和时延、以及UE和AN设备的定位能力。当使用多种定位方案进行混合定位时,LMF可以将接收到的结果进行结合,并据此进行位置估计。The LMF is mainly responsible for managing and controlling the positioning request of the UE. Specifically, the LMF can send positioning-related auxiliary information to the UE through the LTE positioning protocol (LPP); the LMF can control the positioning measurement through the NR positioning protocol A (NR positioning protocol A, NRPPa) between the LMF and the AN device , for example, to control the uplink measurement performed by the AN device or the downlink measurement performed by the UE. In addition, the LMF may also select a positioning scheme of the network. For example, the LMF may select a positioning scheme according to at least one of the following: positioning server, accuracy and delay required by QoS, and positioning capabilities of UE and AN equipment. When multiple positioning schemes are used for mixed positioning, LMF can combine the received results and estimate the position accordingly.
GMLC主要负责在定位服务器和控制面网元之间传递定位相关信息,例如,定位请求,位置信息等。The GMLC is mainly responsible for transmitting positioning-related information, such as positioning requests and location information, between the positioning server and network elements on the control plane.
LRF为外部LCS客户端获取与UE有关的位置信息。LRF可与单独的GMLC交互,也可以与GMLC集成以获得定位信息。The LRF obtains UE-related location information for an external LCS client. LRF can interact with a separate GMLC, and can also be integrated with GMLC to obtain positioning information.
另外,图1所示架构中的部分通信设备也能实现用于LCS的功能,下面对此进行说明。In addition, some communication devices in the architecture shown in FIG. 1 can also implement functions for the LCS, which will be described below.
NEF可用于在GMLC和AF之间传递定位相关信息,例如,用于请求获取位置信息的请求(也可以称为定位请求),位置信息等。另外,在本申请中,NEF还可以为UAS NF。UAS NF为5G移动通信系统中为无人机提供服务的网元,功能与NEF相同。The NEF can be used to transfer location-related information between the GMLC and the AF, for example, a request for obtaining location information (also referred to as a location request), location information, and the like. In addition, in this application, NEF can also be UAS NF. UAS NF is a network element that provides services for drones in the 5G mobile communication system, and its function is the same as that of NEF.
AMF可用于在LMF和其他通信设备(例如,AN设备、UE或GMLC)之间传递定位相关信息,例如,用于请求获取位置信息的请求、位置信息、定位数据等。The AMF can be used to transfer location-related information between the LMF and other communication devices (eg, AN device, UE or GMLC), for example, a request for obtaining location information, location information, location data, etc.
AN设备和UE可用于为LMF提供定位数据。AN devices and UEs can be used to provide positioning data for the LMF.
图1和图2中还展示了通信系统中多个网元之间的接口。例如,N1是UE和核心网控制面之间的接口,UE和AMF之间可以通过N1接口进行交互。N2是接入网设备和核心网控制面之间的接口,接入网设备与AMF之间可以通过N2接口进行交互。N3是接入网设备和UPF之间的通信接口,用于传输用户数据。N4是SMF和UPF之间的接口,用于对UPF进行策略配置等。N6是UPF与DN之间的接口。N8是AMF和UDM之间的接口。NL1是AMF和LMF之间的接口。NL2是AMF和GMLC之间的接口。NL5是NEF和LRF之间的接口。NL6是UDM和GMLC之间的接口。N33是NEF和AF之间的接口。CN中的各个控制面网元之间的接口可以采用相应的服务化接口的方式实现,如图1所示。Figures 1 and 2 also show interfaces between multiple network elements in the communication system. For example, N1 is the interface between the UE and the control plane of the core network, and the UE and the AMF can interact through the N1 interface. N2 is an interface between the access network device and the core network control plane, and the access network device and the AMF can interact through the N2 interface. N3 is a communication interface between the access network equipment and the UPF, and is used to transmit user data. N4 is an interface between SMF and UPF, and is used for policy configuration on UPF, etc. N6 is the interface between UPF and DN. N8 is the interface between AMF and UDM. NL1 is the interface between AMF and LMF. NL2 is the interface between AMF and GMLC. NL5 is the interface between NEF and LRF. NL6 is the interface between UDM and GMLC. N33 is the interface between NEF and AF. Interfaces between network elements of the control plane in the CN can be implemented in the form of corresponding service interfaces, as shown in FIG. 1 .
需要说明的是,图1和图2所示的通信系统并不构成本申请实施例能够适用的通信系统的限定。因此本申请实施例提供的通信方法还可以适用于各种制式的通信系统,例如:LTE通信系统、5G通信系统、第六代(The 6th Generation,6G)通信系统以及未来通信系 统、车到万物(vehicle to everything,V2X)、长期演进-车联网(LTE-vehicle,LTE-V)、车到车(vehicle to vehicle,V2V)、车联网、机器类通信(Machine Type Communications,MTC)、物联网(internet of things,IoT)、长期演进-机器到机器(LTE-machine to machine,LTE-M)、机器到机器(machine to machine,M2M)、物联网等。另外,还需要说明的是,本申请实施例也不对通信系统中各网元的名称进行限定,例如,在不同制式的通信系统中,各网元可以有其它名称;又例如,当多个网元融合在同一物理设备中时,该物理设备也可以有其他名称。It should be noted that the communication systems shown in FIG. 1 and FIG. 2 do not limit the applicable communication systems of the embodiments of the present application. Therefore, the communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application can also be applied to communication systems of various standards, such as: LTE communication system, 5G communication system, sixth generation (The 6th Generation, 6G) communication system and future communication system system, vehicle to everything (V2X), long-term evolution-vehicle networking (LTE-vehicle, LTE-V), vehicle-to-vehicle (vehicle to vehicle, V2V), vehicle networking, machine type communications (Machine Type Communications, MTC), Internet of Things (Internet of Things, IoT), Long Term Evolution-Machine to Machine (LTE-Machine to Machine, LTE-M), Machine to Machine (M2M), Internet of Things, etc. In addition, it should be noted that the embodiment of the present application does not limit the names of the network elements in the communication system. For example, in communication systems of different standards, each network element may have other names; When elements are fused in the same physical device, the physical device can also have other names.
为了便于理解本发明,下面参考图3,以USS为LCS客户端,终端设备为UE为例,介绍目前的一种获取终端设备的位置信息的方法。该方法可为移动终结的定位请求(mobile terminated location request,MT-LR))方法。In order to facilitate the understanding of the present invention, referring to FIG. 3 , taking the USS as the LCS client and the terminal device as the UE as an example, a current method for obtaining location information of the terminal device is introduced. The method may be a mobile terminated location request (mobile terminated location request, MT-LR) method.
S301:LCS客户端向GMLC发送LCS服务请求(LCS Service Request),以请求获取UE的位置信息。S301: The LCS client sends an LCS service request (LCS Service Request) to the GMLC to request to obtain the location information of the UE.
其中,LCS服务请求中包含:UE的标识(例如,通用公共用户标识(generic public subscription identity,GPSI)或用户永久标识(subscription permanent identifier,SUPI)),所需QoS(required QoS)。Wherein, the LCS service request includes: UE's identity (eg, generic public subscription identity (GPSI) or user permanent identifier (subscription permanent identifier, SUPI)), required QoS (required QoS).
可选的,该服务请求还可包含用于指示LCS客户端的信息(例如,LCS客户端的标识)。Optionally, the service request may also include information for indicating the LCS client (for example, the identifier of the LCS client).
S302:GMLC向UDM发送获取请求(Nudm_UECM_Get Request),以请求获取当前为该UE服务的AMF的地址。S302: The GMLC sends a get request (Nudm_UECM_Get Request) to the UDM to request to get the address of the AMF currently serving the UE.
其中,该获取请求中包含该UE的标识。Wherein, the acquisition request includes the identifier of the UE.
可选的,该获取请求还可用于获取针对该LCS客户端的LCS隐私配置文件(LCS privacy profile)。此时,该获取请求中还可包含用于指示LCS客户端的信息。Optionally, the acquisition request can also be used to acquire an LCS privacy profile (LCS privacy profile) for the LCS client. At this time, the acquisition request may also include information used to indicate the LCS client.
S303:GMLC接收来自UDM的获取响应(Nudm_UECM_Get Response)。S303: The GMLC receives a get response (Nudm_UECM_Get Response) from the UDM.
其中,该获取响应中包含当前为该UE服务的AMF的地址。Wherein, the acquisition response includes the address of the AMF currently serving the UE.
可选的,当获取请求中包含用于指示LCS客户端的信息时,该获取响应中还可包含LCS隐私配置文件。当LCS隐私配置文件指示授权LCS客户端获取该UE的位置信息时,GMLC可执行S304。Optionally, when the obtaining request includes information for indicating the LCS client, the obtaining response may further include the LCS privacy configuration file. When the LCS privacy configuration file indicates that the LCS client is authorized to obtain the location information of the UE, the GMLC may perform S304.
S304:GMLC向AMF发送提供位置信息请求(Namf_Location_ProvidePositioningInfo Request),以请求获取该UE的位置信息。S304: The GMLC sends a location information providing request (Namf_Location_ProvidePositioningInfo Request) to the AMF to request to obtain the location information of the UE.
其中,该提供位置信息请求可包含该UE的标识和所需QoS。Wherein, the request for providing location information may include the identity of the UE and the required QoS.
S305:如果该UE处于空闲态,AMF可发起网络侧触发的业务请求(network triggered service request)流程,以建立AMF与UE之间的信令连接。S305: If the UE is in an idle state, the AMF may initiate a network-triggered service request (network triggered service request) procedure to establish a signaling connection between the AMF and the UE.
S305为可选步骤。例如,当该UE处于连接态,可以不执行S305。S305 is an optional step. For example, when the UE is in a connected state, S305 may not be executed.
S306:AMF选择LMF。S306: The AMF selects the LMF.
S307:AMF向LMF发送确定定位请求(Nlmf_location_DetermineLocation Request),以请求获取UE的位置信息。S307: The AMF sends a determine location request (Nlmf_location_DetermineLocation Request) to the LMF to request to acquire the location information of the UE.
其中,该确定定位请求中还可包含该UE的服务小区的小区标识(serving cell identity)。Wherein, the determining and positioning request may also include a cell identity (serving cell identity) of the serving cell of the UE.
当LCS客户端请求周期性的获取UE的位置信息(换句话说,LCS客户端请求周期性对该UE进行定位)时,步骤S301、S304和S307的消息中还可包含定位周期。When the LCS client requests to periodically obtain the location information of the UE (in other words, the LCS client requests to periodically locate the UE), the messages in steps S301, S304 and S307 may also include a positioning period.
S308:LMF发起对UE的定位流程。 S308: The LMF initiates a positioning procedure for the UE.
可选的,LMF可通过与UE和/或为UE服务的AN设备交互来获取UE的定位数据,并根据定位数据计算UE的位置。Optionally, the LMF may obtain the positioning data of the UE by interacting with the UE and/or the AN device serving the UE, and calculate the position of the UE according to the positioning data.
另外,当LCS客户端请求周期性的获取UE的位置信息时,LMF可向通过AMF向UE和/或为UE服务的AN设备发送定位周期。这样,UE和/或为UE服务的AN设备可按照该定位周期测量定位数据,并将定位数据发送给LMF。然后,LMF可据此计算UE的位置。In addition, when the LCS client requests to periodically obtain the location information of the UE, the LMF may send a positioning period to the AN device serving the UE and/or serving the UE through the AMF. In this way, the UE and/or the AN device serving the UE can measure positioning data according to the positioning period, and send the positioning data to the LMF. The LMF can then calculate the location of the UE based on this.
S309:LMF向AMF发送确定定位响应(Nlmf_location_DetermineLocation Response)。S309: The LMF sends a determine location response (Nlmf_location_DetermineLocation Response) to the AMF.
其中,该确定定位响应中可包含:定位结果。其中,定位结果可包含:UE的位置信息以及该位置信息的准确率。Wherein, the positioning determination response may include: a positioning result. Wherein, the positioning result may include: location information of the UE and accuracy rate of the location information.
S310:AMF向GMLC发送提供位置信息响应(Namf_Location_ProvidePositioningInfo Response)。S310: The AMF sends a location information providing response (Namf_Location_ProvidePositioningInfo Response) to the GMLC.
其中,该提供位置信息响应中可包含定位结果。Wherein, the location information providing response may include a positioning result.
S311:GMLC向LCS客户端发送LCS服务响应(LCS Service Response)。S311: The GMLC sends an LCS service response (LCS Service Response) to the LCS client.
其中,该LCS服务响应中可包含定位结果。Wherein, the LCS service response may include a positioning result.
可选的,当USS为AF时,图3所示方法中的LCS客户端可替换为AF,LCS客户端与GMLC之间的交互可以替换为AF通过NEF与GMLC进行交互。例如,在S301中,AF可通过NEF向GMLC发送LCS服务请求,以请求获取UE的位置信息。在S311中,GMLC可通过NEF向AF发送LCS服务响应。Optionally, when the USS is the AF, the LCS client in the method shown in FIG. 3 can be replaced by the AF, and the interaction between the LCS client and the GMLC can be replaced by the interaction between the AF and the GMLC through the NEF. For example, in S301, the AF may send an LCS service request to the GMLC through the NEF, so as to request to obtain the location information of the UE. In S311, the GMLC may send an LCS service response to the AF through the NEF.
可选的,UE也可以请求获取UE的位置信息。此时,UE可通过AMF向LMF发送定位请求,该定位请求中包含UE的标识。当UE请求周期性的获取UE的位置信息,还可在定位请求中包含定位周期。通过图3所示方法中的S308和S309,AMF可获得UE的定位结果;然后,AMF可将定位结果发送给UE。Optionally, the UE may also request to acquire the location information of the UE. At this time, the UE may send a positioning request to the LMF through the AMF, and the positioning request includes the identity of the UE. When the UE requests to obtain the location information of the UE periodically, the positioning period may also be included in the positioning request. Through S308 and S309 in the method shown in FIG. 3 , the AMF can obtain the positioning result of the UE; then, the AMF can send the positioning result to the UE.
图3所示方法具有如下问题至少一项:The method shown in Figure 3 has at least one of the following problems:
问题1:更新定位周期时设备之间交互的信令较多,流程较为繁琐。Problem 1: When updating the positioning cycle, there are many signaling interactions between devices, and the process is relatively cumbersome.
具体的,当需要进行周期定位时,发起请求定位的通信设备(例如,UE,作为USS的LCS客户端或AF)在用于请求获取终端设备的位置信息的请求中包含定位周期。这样,当需要更新定位周期时,发起请求定位的通信设备需重新发起定位请求流程(即图3所示的流程),从而导致设备之间交互的信令较多,流程较为繁琐。Specifically, when periodic positioning is required, the communication device that initiates the positioning request (for example, the UE, the LCS client as the USS or the AF) includes the positioning cycle in the request for obtaining the location information of the terminal device. In this way, when the positioning cycle needs to be updated, the communication device that initiates the positioning request needs to re-initiate the positioning request process (that is, the process shown in FIG. 3 ), which results in more signaling interactions between devices and the process is more cumbersome.
下面以如下场景为例进行说明该问题的产生:The following scenario is used as an example to illustrate the occurrence of this problem:
场景1:当UE为UAV时,在UAV飞行前USS可获取UAV的预定飞行路径。USS可通过移动通信系统对UAV进行周期性定位,从而获取UAV的真实飞行路径。通过对比预定飞行路径和真实飞行路径,USS可确定UAV是否按照预定飞行路径飞行。Scenario 1: When the UE is a UAV, the USS can obtain the scheduled flight path of the UAV before the UAV flies. The USS can periodically locate the UAV through the mobile communication system, so as to obtain the real flight path of the UAV. By comparing the intended flight path with the actual flight path, the USS can determine whether the UAV is following the intended flight path.
在场景1中,UAV在飞行过程中的速度可能不是匀速的。当UAV的移动速度较小或UAV静止时,USS每次获取的位置偏移很小,因此,不需要采用与高速移动时一样的定位周期来进行定位。此时,如果USS发起定位周期的更新,则需要重新发起定位请求流程,从而导致设备之间交互的信令较多。In Scenario 1, the speed of the UAV may not be uniform during flight. When the moving speed of the UAV is small or the UAV is stationary, the position offset obtained by the USS each time is very small, therefore, it is not necessary to use the same positioning cycle as when the UAV is moving at a high speed for positioning. At this time, if the USS initiates an update of the positioning cycle, it needs to re-initiate the positioning request process, resulting in more signaling interactions between devices.
问题2:LMF按照定位周期向发起请求定位的通信设备发送UE的位置信息,导致设备之间交互的信令较多。Problem 2: The LMF sends the location information of the UE to the communication device that initiates the positioning request according to the positioning cycle, resulting in more signaling interactions between the devices.
以上述场景1为例,当UAV按照预定飞行路径飞行时,USS并不需要频繁获取UAV的位置信息。此时,如果LMF仍按照定位周期向发起请求定位的通信设备发送UE的位置 信息,则会导致设备之间交互的信令较多。Taking the above scenario 1 as an example, when the UAV is flying according to the predetermined flight path, the USS does not need to frequently obtain the location information of the UAV. At this time, if the LMF still sends the location of the UE to the communication device that initiates the positioning request according to the positioning cycle information, it will result in more signaling interactions between devices.
下面结合附图对本申请提供的方案进行说明。The solutions provided by the present application will be described below in conjunction with the accompanying drawings.
本申请实施例提供了一种通信方法,该方法可应用于图1或图2所示的通信系统中,可用于解决上述问题1。下面参阅图4所示的流程图,对该方法的流程进行具体说明。An embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, which can be applied to the communication system shown in FIG. 1 or FIG. 2 , and can be used to solve the above problem 1. Referring to the flow chart shown in FIG. 4 , the flow of the method will be described in detail.
S401:控制面网元获取终端设备的位置信息。其中,位置信息可用于表示终端设备的位置和/或移动速度。S401: The control plane network element acquires location information of the terminal device. Wherein, the location information may be used to represent the location and/or moving speed of the terminal device.
在本申请实施例中,控制面网元可以但不限于为以下之一:LMF、GMLC、NEF;该终端设备可以但不限于为UAV或无人驾驶汽车。In the embodiment of this application, the control plane network element may be, but not limited to, one of the following: LMF, GMLC, NEF; the terminal device may be, but not limited to, a UAV or an unmanned vehicle.
其中,控制面网元可以在以下情形之一执行S401:Wherein, the control plane network element may perform S401 in one of the following situations:
情形1:控制面网元接收到来自第二通信设备的用于请求获取该终端设备的位置信息的请求。Scenario 1: The control plane network element receives a request from the second communication device for obtaining the location information of the terminal device.
情形2:控制面网元接收到来自第二通信设备的用于请求获取该终端设备的位置信息的请求,该请求中包含定位周期。当定位周期达到时,控制面网元执行S401。Scenario 2: The control plane network element receives a request from the second communication device for obtaining the location information of the terminal device, and the request includes a positioning period. When the positioning period is reached, the control plane network element executes S401.
其中,在情形1和情形2中,第二通信设备可以为以下之一:AF、LCS客户端、终端设备。其中,AF和LCS客户端可作为USS。用于请求获取该终端设备的位置信息的请求可以但不限于以下至少一项:LCS服务请求、提供位置信息请求、确定定位请求。Wherein, in situation 1 and situation 2, the second communication device may be one of the following: AF, LCS client, terminal device. Among them, AF and LCS clients can be used as USS. The request for obtaining the location information of the terminal device may be, but not limited to, at least one of the following: LCS service request, location information provision request, and location determination request.
可选的,控制面网元通过如下方式之一获取终端设备的位置信息:Optionally, the control plane network element obtains the location information of the terminal device in one of the following ways:
方式一:控制面网元根据接收的来自终端设备或终端设备接入的AN设备的定位数据,确定该终端设备的位置信息。Method 1: The control plane network element determines the location information of the terminal device according to the received positioning data from the terminal device or the AN device connected to the terminal device.
1、终端设备的位置:1. The location of the terminal equipment:
例如,该定位数据可包括:终端设备的定时提前量(time advance,TA)和来波方向(angle of arrival,AoA)。通过终端设备的TA,控制面网元可确定终端设备相对于AN设备的距离;通过AoA,控制面网元可确定终端设备相对于AN设备的方向。然后,根据AN设备的位置,控制面网元即可确定终端设备的位置。For example, the positioning data may include: a timing advance (time advance, TA) and a direction of arrival (angle of arrival, AoA) of the terminal device. Through the TA of the terminal device, the control plane network element can determine the distance between the terminal device and the AN device; through the AoA, the control plane network element can determine the direction of the terminal device relative to the AN device. Then, according to the location of the AN device, the control plane network element can determine the location of the terminal device.
2、终端设备的移动速度:2. The mobile speed of the terminal equipment:
例如,该定位数据可包括:终端设备在时刻1的TA和AoA,以及终端设备在时刻2的TA和AoA。通过1中的方法,控制面网元可确定终端设备在时刻1的位置1和在时刻2的位置2。然后,控制面网元可确定终端设备的移动速度为(位置2-位置1)/(时刻2-时刻1)。为了准确确定终端设备的移动速度,控制面网元可获得多个时刻的位置,据此确定终端设备的移动速度。For example, the positioning data may include: the TA and AoA of the terminal device at time 1, and the TA and AoA of the terminal device at time 2. Through the method in 1, the control plane network element can determine the position 1 of the terminal device at time 1 and the position 2 at time 2. Then, the control plane network element may determine that the moving speed of the terminal device is (position 2 - position 1)/(time 2 - time 1). In order to accurately determine the moving speed of the terminal device, the control plane network element may obtain positions at multiple times, and determine the moving speed of the terminal device accordingly.
应理解,上述确定终端设备位置信息的方法仅是示例,也可以采用其他现有的确定终端设备位置信息的方法,本申请对此不作限定。It should be understood that the above method for determining the location information of the terminal device is only an example, and other existing methods for determining the location information of the terminal device may also be used, which is not limited in this application.
方式二:控制面网元接收来自第三通信设备的终端设备的位置信息。Manner 2: The control plane network element receives the location information of the terminal device from the third communication device.
其中,终端设备的位置信息可以是第三通信设备确定的,确定的方式可参考方式一,此处不再赘述。Wherein, the location information of the terminal device may be determined by the third communication device, and the determination method may refer to method 1, which will not be repeated here.
在方式二中,控制面网元可以为GMLC或NEF,第三通信设备可以为LMF。具体的,当控制面网元为GMLC时,控制面网元可通过AMF接收来自LMF的终端设备的位置信息;当控制面网元为NEF时,控制面网元可依次通过GMLC和AMF来接收来自LMF的 终端设备的位置信息。In the second manner, the control plane network element may be a GMLC or NEF, and the third communication device may be an LMF. Specifically, when the control plane network element is GMLC, the control plane network element can receive the location information of the terminal equipment from LMF through AMF; when the control plane network element is NEF, the control plane network element can receive through GMLC and AMF in turn from LMF The location information of the terminal device.
方式三:控制面网元可根据终端设备的全球定位系统(global positioning system,GPS)信息,确定终端设备的位置信息。Method 3: The control plane network element can determine the location information of the terminal device according to the global positioning system (global positioning system, GPS) information of the terminal device.
1、终端设备的位置:1. The location of the terminal equipment:
控制面网元可将终端设备的GPS信息指示的位置确定为终端设备的位置。The control plane network element may determine the position indicated by the GPS information of the terminal device as the position of the terminal device.
2、终端设备的移动速度:2. The mobile speed of the terminal equipment:
控制面网元可获取该终端设备在不同时刻的GPS信息,根据不同时刻的GPS信息确定终端设备的移动速度。例如,控制面网元可获取该终端设备在时刻3的GPS信息1和在时刻4的GPS信息2。GPS信息1指示位置3,GPS信息2指示位置4。控制面网元可确定终端设备的移动速度为(位置4-位置3)/(时刻4-时刻3)。为了准确确定终端设备的移动速度,控制面网元可获得多个时刻的位置,据此确定终端设备的移动速度。The control plane network element can obtain the GPS information of the terminal device at different times, and determine the moving speed of the terminal device according to the GPS information at different times. For example, the control plane network element may acquire the GPS information 1 of the terminal device at time 3 and the GPS information 2 of the terminal device at time 4. GPS information 1 indicates position 3, and GPS information 2 indicates position 4. The control plane network element may determine that the moving speed of the terminal device is (position 4 - position 3)/(time 4 - time 3). In order to accurately determine the moving speed of the terminal device, the control plane network element may obtain positions at multiple times, and determine the moving speed of the terminal device accordingly.
S402:当位置信息满足第一条件时,控制面网元向终端设备或终端设备接入的接入网AN设备发送第一定位周期配置信息。其中,第一定位周期配置信息可用于指示第一条件对应的第一定位周期,或者第一定位周期配置信息可用于指示第一定位周期。S402: When the location information satisfies the first condition, the control plane network element sends the first location cycle configuration information to the terminal device or the access network AN device connected to the terminal device. Wherein, the first positioning cycle configuration information may be used to indicate the first positioning cycle corresponding to the first condition, or the first positioning cycle configuration information may be used to indicate the first positioning cycle.
其中,第一定位周期配置信息可以直接指示第一定位周期,例如,第一定位周期配置信息为第一定位周期(例如,25ms)。第一定位周期配置信息也可以间接指示第一定位周期,例如,当第一定位周期配置信息的值为1时,间接指示第一定位周期为25ms。另外,第一定位周期配置信息可以承载在现有的消息中,也可以承载在新的消息中,本申请对此不作限定。Wherein, the first positioning cycle configuration information may directly indicate the first positioning cycle, for example, the first positioning cycle configuration information is the first positioning cycle (for example, 25ms). The first positioning period configuration information may also indirectly indicate the first positioning period. For example, when the value of the first positioning period configuration information is 1, it indirectly indicates that the first positioning period is 25 ms. In addition, the configuration information of the first positioning period may be carried in an existing message or in a new message, which is not limited in this application.
可选的,控制面网元通过AMF网元向终端设备或终端设备接入的AN设备发送第一定位周期配置信息。Optionally, the control plane network element sends the first positioning cycle configuration information to the terminal device or the AN device connected to the terminal device through the AMF network element.
通过该方法,当终端设备的位置信息满足第一条件时,控制面网元即可发送用于指示与第一条件对应的第一定位周期的信息;这样,控制面网元即可根据终端设备的位置信息对定位周期进行更新,无需重新发起定位流程,从而可以减少发起请求定位的通信设备(例如,终端设备或USS)与控制面网元之间的交互,简化定位流程。With this method, when the location information of the terminal device satisfies the first condition, the control plane network element can send information indicating the first positioning cycle corresponding to the first condition; The positioning cycle is updated by using the location information of the system without re-initiating the positioning process, thereby reducing the interaction between the communication device (for example, terminal device or USS) that initiates the positioning request and the network element of the control plane, and simplifying the positioning process.
可选的,在图4所示方法的一种实施场景中,第一条件可以但不限于包括以下至少一项:Optionally, in an implementation scenario of the method shown in FIG. 4, the first condition may include, but is not limited to, at least one of the following:
条件1:终端设备的位置位于第一位置范围内;Condition 1: the location of the terminal device is within the range of the first location;
条件2:终端设备的位置位于第二位置范围外;Condition 2: the location of the terminal device is outside the range of the second location;
条件3:终端设备的移动速度位于第一速度范围内;Condition 3: the moving speed of the terminal device is within the first speed range;
条件4:终端设备的移动速度位于第二速度范围外。Condition 4: the moving speed of the terminal device is outside the second speed range.
下面对各条件的具体内容进行说明。The details of each condition will be described below.
对于条件1:For condition 1:
在一些可能的实现方式中,第一位置范围可以为地理范围,例如,第一区域,或者与第一区域的最短直线距离位于第一距离范围内的区域。第一区域的一个示例为禁飞区域。第一区域的另一个示例为允许飞行区域。In some possible implementation manners, the first location range may be a geographic range, for example, a first area, or an area whose shortest linear distance from the first area is within the first distance range. An example of a first area is a no-fly area. Another example of the first area is an allowed flight area.
在另一些可能的实现方式中,第一位置范围还可以为通信设备的服务范围。例如,该通信设备的服务范围都落入到上述地理范围之内时,可通过通信设备的服务范围来指示第一位置范围。其中,用于指示通信设备的服务范围的信息可包括以下至少一项:一个或多 个AN设备标识(identity,ID)、一个或多个小区标识(cell identity,cell ID)、一个或多个跟踪区标识(tracking area identity,TAI)。In some other possible implementation manners, the first location range may also be a service range of the communication device. For example, when the service range of the communication device falls within the aforementioned geographical range, the first location range may be indicated by the service range of the communication device. Wherein, the information used to indicate the service scope of the communication device may include at least one of the following: one or more An AN device identity (identity, ID), one or more cell identities (cell identity, cell ID), and one or more tracking area identities (tracking area identity, TAI).
对于条件2:For condition 2:
第二位置范围的具体内容可参考对条件1的说明,只是将其中的第一位置范围替换为第二位置范围,此处不再赘述。For the specific content of the second location range, please refer to the description of condition 1, except that the first location range is replaced by the second location range, which will not be repeated here.
应理解,第一位置范围和第二位置范围可以相同,也可以不同,还可以部分重叠。It should be understood that the first location range and the second location range may be the same or different, and may also partially overlap.
对于条件3和条件4:For condition 3 and condition 4:
应理解,第一速度范围和第二速度范围可以相同,也可以不同,还可以部分重叠。It should be understood that the first speed range and the second speed range may be the same or different, and may also partially overlap.
该方法提供了多种条件,通过灵活设置条件,控制面网元可以灵活调整定位周期。This method provides a variety of conditions, and by flexibly setting the conditions, the control plane network element can flexibly adjust the positioning period.
可选的,在图4所示方法的一种实施场景中,上述方法还包括:Optionally, in an implementation scenario of the method shown in Figure 4, the above method further includes:
S403:控制面网元接收来自第一通信设备的第一信息。其中,第一信息可包含第一条件与第一定位周期的对应关系。S403: The control plane network element receives first information from the first communication device. Wherein, the first information may include a corresponding relationship between the first condition and the first positioning period.
其中,第一通信设备可以但不限于为以下之一:AMF、NEF、LCS客户端、AF。Wherein, the first communication device may be, but not limited to, one of the following: AMF, NEF, LCS client, and AF.
例如,当控制面网元为LMF时,第一通信设备为AMF。LMF可依次通过AMF、GMLC接收来自LCS客户端的第一信息;或者,LMF依次通过AMF、GMLC、NEF接收来自AF的第一信息。For example, when the control plane network element is an LMF, the first communication device is an AMF. The LMF may sequentially receive the first information from the LCS client through the AMF and the GMLC; or, the LMF may sequentially receive the first information from the AF through the AMF, the GMLC and the NEF.
又例如,当控制面网元为GLMC时,第一通信设备为NEF或LCS客户端。当第一通信设备为NEF时,GMLC可通过NEF接收来自AF的第一信息。For another example, when the control plane network element is a GLMC, the first communication device is a NEF or LCS client. When the first communication device is the NEF, the GMLC can receive the first information from the AF through the NEF.
再例如,当控制面网元为NEF时,第一通信设备为AF。For another example, when the control plane network element is an NEF, the first communication device is an AF.
另外,该第一信息可以为包含第一条件与第一定位周期的对应关系的消息(例如,用于请求获取终端设备的位置信息的请求),也可以为消息中的信元。具体地,当第一信息为信元时,第一信息可以复用现有消息中的信元,也可以是现有消息中的新的信元。In addition, the first information may be a message including the correspondence between the first condition and the first positioning cycle (for example, a request for obtaining the location information of the terminal device), or may be an information element in the message. Specifically, when the first information is an information element, the first information may reuse an information element in an existing message, or may be a new information element in an existing message.
例如,第一信息可以为第一条件与第一定位周期的对应关系表,该对应关系表可如表1所示。其中,第一条件的具体内容可参考上文对第一条件的说明,此处不再赘述。For example, the first information may be a table of correspondence between the first condition and the first positioning period, and the table of correspondence may be as shown in Table 1. Wherein, for the specific content of the first condition, reference may be made to the description of the first condition above, which will not be repeated here.
表1
Table 1
应理解,所述第一信息中还可以包含其他条件与定位周期的对应关系,本申请对此不予限制。It should be understood that the first information may also include correspondences between other conditions and positioning periods, which is not limited in the present application.
此外,本申请对S403和S401的执行顺序不作限定。例如,可以先执行S403,再执行S401;也可以先执行S401,再执行S403;还可以同时执行S401和S403。In addition, the present application does not limit the execution order of S403 and S401. For example, S403 can be executed first, and then S401 is executed; S401 can also be executed first, and then S403 can be executed; S401 and S403 can also be executed simultaneously.
可选的,上述方法还包括:Optionally, the above method also includes:
S404:当位置信息满足第一条件时,控制面网元根据第一信息和位置信息,确定第一定位周期配置信息。S404: When the location information satisfies the first condition, the control plane network element determines first positioning period configuration information according to the first information and the location information.
例如,第一条件为条件1-1,即第一条件为终端设备的位置位于第一位置范围内。当终端设备的位置信息表示的位置位于第一位置范围内时,控制面网元可选择第一条件对应的第一定位周期,并生成用于指示第一定位周期的第一定位周期配置信息。For example, the first condition is condition 1-1, that is, the first condition is that the location of the terminal device is within the first location range. When the location indicated by the location information of the terminal device is within the first location range, the control plane network element may select a first location cycle corresponding to the first condition, and generate first location cycle configuration information for indicating the first location cycle.
又例如,第一条件为条件1-2,即第一条件为终端设备的位置位于第一位置范围外。 当终端设备的位置信息表示的位置位于第一位置范围外时,控制面网元可选择第一条件对应的第一定位周期,并生成用于指示第一定位周期的第一定位周期配置信息。For another example, the first condition is condition 1-2, that is, the first condition is that the location of the terminal device is outside the first location range. When the location indicated by the location information of the terminal device is outside the first location range, the control plane network element may select a first location cycle corresponding to the first condition, and generate first location cycle configuration information for indicating the first location cycle.
再例如,第一条件为条件2-1,即第一条件为终端设备的移动速度位于第一速度范围内。当终端设备的位置信息表示的移动速度位于第一速度范围内时,控制面网元可选择第一条件对应的第一定位周期,并生成用于指示第一定位周期的第一定位周期配置信息。For another example, the first condition is condition 2-1, that is, the first condition is that the moving speed of the terminal device is within the first speed range. When the moving speed indicated by the location information of the terminal device is within the first speed range, the control plane network element may select the first positioning cycle corresponding to the first condition, and generate the first positioning cycle configuration information indicating the first positioning cycle .
再例如,第一条件包括条件1-1和条件2-1,即第一条件包括:终端设备的位置位于第一位置范围内,且终端设备的移动速度位于第一速度范围内。当终端设备的位置信息表示的位置位于第一位置范围内,且终端设备的位置信息表示的移动速度位于第一速度范围内时,控制面网元可选择第一条件对应的第一定位周期,并生成用于指示第一定位周期的第一定位周期配置信息。For another example, the first condition includes condition 1-1 and condition 2-1, that is, the first condition includes: the location of the terminal device is within the first location range, and the moving speed of the terminal device is within the first speed range. When the position indicated by the position information of the terminal device is within the first position range, and the moving speed indicated by the position information of the terminal device is within the first speed range, the control plane network element may select the first positioning period corresponding to the first condition, And generate first positioning cycle configuration information for indicating the first positioning cycle.
通过该方法,控制面网元可根据终端设备的位置,选择与该位置满足的条件对应的定位周期进行定位。这样,在需要更新定位周期时,控制面网元可自行更新定位周期,无需重新发起定位流程,从而可以减少发起请求定位的通信设备(例如,终端设备或USS)与控制面网元之间的交互,简化定位流程。Through this method, the control plane network element can select a positioning period corresponding to a condition satisfied by the position to perform positioning according to the position of the terminal device. In this way, when the positioning period needs to be updated, the control plane network element can update the positioning period by itself without re-initiating the positioning process, thereby reducing the communication device (for example, a terminal device or USS) that initiates the positioning request and the control plane network element. Interaction simplifies the positioning process.
可选的,在图4所示方法的一种实施场景中,在S401之前,上述方法还包括:Optionally, in an implementation scenario of the method shown in FIG. 4, before S401, the above method further includes:
S405:控制面网元向终端设备或终端设备接入的AN设备发送第二定位周期配置信息,第二定位周期配置信息用于指示第二定位周期。S405: The control plane network element sends the second positioning cycle configuration information to the terminal device or the AN device connected to the terminal device, where the second positioning cycle configuration information is used to indicate the second positioning cycle.
其中,第二定位周期配置信息可以直接指示第二定位周期,例如,第二定位周期配置信息为第二定位周期(例如,10ms)。第二定位周期配置信息也可以间接指示第二定位周期,例如,当第二定位周期配置信息的值为2时,间接指示第二定位周期为10ms。另外,第二定位周期配置信息可以承载在现有的消息中,也可以承载在新的消息中,本申请对此不作限定。Wherein, the second positioning cycle configuration information may directly indicate the second positioning cycle, for example, the second positioning cycle configuration information is the second positioning cycle (for example, 10 ms). The second positioning cycle configuration information may also indirectly indicate the second positioning cycle, for example, when the value of the second positioning cycle configuration information is 2, it indirectly indicates that the second positioning cycle is 10 ms. In addition, the configuration information of the second positioning cycle may be carried in an existing message or in a new message, which is not limited in this application.
可选的,控制面网元通过AMF网元向终端设备或终端设备接入的AN设备发送第二定位周期配置信息。Optionally, the control plane network element sends the second positioning period configuration information to the terminal device or the AN device connected to the terminal device through the AMF network element.
可选的,在向终端设备发送第二定位周期配置信息之前,控制面网元可通过以下方式之一来获取第二定位周期。Optionally, before sending the configuration information of the second positioning period to the terminal device, the control plane network element may obtain the second positioning period in one of the following ways.
方式1:控制面网元接收来自第一通信设备的用于指示第二定位周期的信息。Manner 1: The control plane network element receives the information indicating the second positioning period from the first communication device.
其中,第一通信设备可以但不限于为以下之一:AMF、NEF、LCS客户端、AF。Wherein, the first communication device may be, but not limited to, one of the following: AMF, NEF, LCS client, and AF.
例如,当控制面网元为LMF时,第一通信设备为AMF。LMF可依次通过AMF、GMLC接收来自LCS客户端的用于指示第二定位周期的信息;或者,LMF依次通过AMF、GMLC、NEF接收来自AF的用于指示第二定位周期的信息。For example, when the control plane network element is an LMF, the first communication device is an AMF. The LMF may sequentially receive the information indicating the second positioning period from the LCS client through the AMF and the GMLC; or, the LMF may sequentially receive the information indicating the second positioning period from the AF through the AMF, the GMLC and the NEF.
又例如,当控制面网元为GLMC时,第一通信设备为NEF或LCS客户端。当第一通信设备为NEF时,GMLC可通过NEF接收来自AF的用于指示第二定位周期的信息。For another example, when the control plane network element is a GLMC, the first communication device is a NEF or LCS client. When the first communication device is the NEF, the GMLC may receive the information indicating the second positioning period from the AF through the NEF.
再例如,当控制面网元为NEF时,第一通信设备为AF。For another example, when the control plane network element is an NEF, the first communication device is an AF.
在方式1中,第二定位周期可为默认的定位周期或初始的定位周期。用于指示第二定位周期的信息可以直接为第二定位周期,也可以间接指示第二定位周期。另外,用于指示第二定位周期的信息可包含现有的消息中,也可以包含在新的消息中。当用于指示第二定位周期的信息包含现有的消息中时,该消息可为用于请求获取终端设备的位置信息的请求(例如,LCS服务请求、提供位置信息请求或确定定位请求)。 In manner 1, the second positioning period may be a default positioning period or an initial positioning period. The information used to indicate the second positioning period may directly be the second positioning period, or may indirectly indicate the second positioning period. In addition, the information used to indicate the second positioning cycle may be included in an existing message or in a new message. When the information for indicating the second positioning period is included in the existing message, the message may be a request for obtaining the location information of the terminal device (for example, an LCS service request, a request for providing location information, or a request for determining location).
方式2:控制面网元接收来自第一通信设备的用于指示至少一个定位周期的信息,选择至少一个定位周期中最小的周期作为第二定位周期。Mode 2: The control plane network element receives information indicating at least one positioning period from the first communication device, and selects the smallest period among the at least one positioning period as the second positioning period.
其中,控制面网元接收来自第一通信设备的用于指示至少一个定位周期的信息的方式可参考方式1,只是将其中的第二定位周期替换为至少一个定位周期,此处不再赘述。Wherein, the manner in which the control plane network element receives the information indicating at least one positioning period from the first communication device can refer to the manner 1, except that the second positioning period is replaced with at least one positioning period, which will not be repeated here.
另外,用于指示至少一个定位周期的信息可以为用于指示至少一个条件和至少一个定位周期的对应关系的信息(例如,上述第一信息)。其中,至少一个条件可包含第一条件,至少一个定位周期可包含第一定位周期。至少一个条件和至少一个定位周期可以是一对一的关系,也可以是多对一的关系。In addition, the information used to indicate at least one positioning cycle may be information used to indicate a correspondence between at least one condition and at least one positioning cycle (for example, the above-mentioned first information). Wherein, at least one condition may include the first condition, and at least one positioning cycle may include the first positioning cycle. At least one condition and at least one positioning period may be in a one-to-one relationship, or may be in a many-to-one relationship.
方式3:当终端设备的位置信息满足第二条件时,控制面网元确定与第二条件对应的第二定位周期。也就是说,在终端设备的移动过程中,控制面网元先根据终端设备的位置信息1,确定出第二定位周期;再根据通过第二定位周期进行定位时得到的终端设备的位置信息2,确定出第一定位周期,从而可对定位周期进行多次更新。Way 3: When the location information of the terminal device satisfies the second condition, the control plane network element determines the second positioning period corresponding to the second condition. That is to say, during the moving process of the terminal device, the network element of the control plane first determines the second positioning period according to the position information 1 of the terminal device; , the first positioning period is determined, so that the positioning period can be updated multiple times.
其中,第二条件可以但不限于包括以下至少一项:Among them, the second condition may include, but is not limited to, at least one of the following:
条件一:终端设备的位置位于第三位置范围内;Condition 1: the location of the terminal device is within the range of the third location;
条件二:终端设备的位置位于第四位置范围外;Condition 2: the location of the terminal device is outside the range of the fourth location;
条件三:终端设备的移动速度位于第三速度范围内;Condition 3: the moving speed of the terminal device is within the third speed range;
条件四:终端设备的移动速度位于第四速度范围外。Condition 4: The moving speed of the terminal device is outside the fourth speed range.
条件一的具体内容可参考条件1,只是将其中的第一位置范围替换为第三位置范围;条件二的具体内容可参考条件2,只是将其中的第二位置范围替换为第四位置范围;条件三的具体内容可参考条件3,只是将其中的第一速度范围替换为第三速度范围;条件四的具体内容可参考条件4,只是将其中的第二速度范围替换为第四速度范围,此处不再赘述。For the specific content of condition 1, please refer to condition 1, just replace the first position range with the third position range; for the specific content of condition 2, refer to condition 2, just replace the second position range with the fourth position range; For the specific content of condition three, please refer to condition 3, just replace the first speed range with the third speed range; for the specific content of condition four, refer to condition 4, just replace the second speed range with the fourth speed range, I won't repeat them here.
可选的,第三位置范围与第一位置范围不同,和/或第四位置范围与第二位置范围不同,和/或第三速度范围与第一速度范围不同,和/或第四速度范围与第二速度范围不同。例如,第一位置范围为小区1的服务范围,第三位置范围为小区2的服务范围;第一速度范围和第三速度范围均为0~5千米每小时(km/h)。又例如,第一位置范围和第三位置范围均为小区1的服务范围;第一速度范围为0~5km/h,第三速度范围为20~30km/h。再例如,第一位置范围为小区1的服务范围,第三位置范围为小区2的服务范围;第一速度范围为0~5km/h,第三速度范围为20~30km/h。再例如,第二位置范围为小区3的服务范围,第四位置范围为小区4的服务范围;第二速度范围和第四速度范围均为5~10km/h。再例如,第二位置范围和第四位置范围均为小区3的服务范围;第二速度范围为0~5km/h,第四速度范围为5~10km/h。再例如,第一位置范围和第三位置范围均为小区1的服务范围;第二位置范围和第四位置范围均为小区3的服务范围;第二速度范围为0~5km/h,第四速度范围为5~10km/h。Optionally, the third position range is different from the first position range, and/or the fourth position range is different from the second position range, and/or the third speed range is different from the first speed range, and/or the fourth speed range Different from the second speed range. For example, the first location range is the service range of cell 1, and the third location range is the service range of cell 2; both the first speed range and the third speed range are 0-5 kilometers per hour (km/h). For another example, both the first location range and the third location range are service areas of the cell 1; the first speed range is 0-5 km/h, and the third speed range is 20-30 km/h. For another example, the first location range is the service area of cell 1, the third location range is the service area of cell 2; the first speed range is 0-5 km/h, and the third speed range is 20-30 km/h. For another example, the second location range is the service range of cell 3, and the fourth location range is the service range of cell 4; both the second speed range and the fourth speed range are 5-10 km/h. For another example, both the second location range and the fourth location range are service areas of the cell 3; the second speed range is 0-5 km/h, and the fourth speed range is 5-10 km/h. For another example, the first location range and the third location range are both the service range of cell 1; the second location range and the fourth location range are both the service range of cell 3; the second speed range is 0-5km/h, and the fourth The speed range is 5-10km/h.
方式4:控制面网元获取预配置的第二定位周期。例如,控制面网元中预配置有第二定位周期,该第二定位周期可为默认的定位周期或初始的定位周期。Way 4: The control plane network element obtains the pre-configured second positioning period. For example, the control plane network element is pre-configured with a second positioning period, and the second positioning period may be a default positioning period or an initial positioning period.
可选的,在控制面网元接收第一信息后,控制面网元确定使用预配置的第二定位周期,并向终端设备或终端设备接入的AN设备发送第二定位周期配置信息。Optionally, after the control plane network element receives the first information, the control plane network element determines to use the preconfigured second positioning period, and sends the second positioning period configuration information to the terminal device or the AN device connected to the terminal device.
通过该方法,控制面网元可通知终端设备第二定位周期,以便根据通过第二定位周期获得的位置信息更新定位周期。 Through this method, the control plane network element can notify the terminal device of the second positioning period, so as to update the positioning period according to the position information obtained through the second positioning period.
可选的,在图4所示方法的一种实施场景中,上述方法还包括:Optionally, in an implementation scenario of the method shown in Figure 4, the above method further includes:
S406:控制面网元向第二通信设备发送用于指示第二定位周期的信息,以及位置信息。S406: The control plane network element sends information for indicating the second positioning period and location information to the second communication device.
其中,第二通信设备可以为以下之一:AF、LCS客户端、终端设备。Wherein, the second communication device may be one of the following: AF, LCS client, and terminal device.
另外,控制面网元可通过现有的消息(例如,确定定位响应、提供位置信息响应、LCS服务响应、用于通知定位结果的通知消息等中的至少一个)向第二通信设备发送用于指示第二定位周期的信息以及位置信息,也可以通过新的消息向第二通信设备发送用于指示第二定位周期的信息以及位置信息。In addition, the control plane network element may send the second communication device a message for The information indicating the second positioning period and the location information may also be sent to the second communication device through a new message to indicate the information indicating the second positioning period and the location information.
此外,本申请对S402和S406的执行顺序不作限定。例如,可以先执行S402,再执行S406;也可以先执行S406,再执行S402;还可以同时执行S402和S406。In addition, the present application does not limit the execution order of S402 and S406. For example, S402 can be executed first, and then S406; or S406 can be executed first, and then S402 can be executed; S402 and S406 can also be executed simultaneously.
通过该方法,当控制面网元可用于更新定位周期时,控制面网元向第二通信设备反馈位置信息时,还会反馈与该位置信息对应的第二定位周期;这样,第二通信设备可以获知位置信息所对应的定位周期,从而可以更准确的对终端设备的移动进行管理。Through this method, when the control plane network element can be used to update the positioning period, when the control plane network element feeds back the position information to the second communication device, it will also feed back the second positioning period corresponding to the position information; thus, the second communication device The positioning period corresponding to the location information can be known, so that the movement of the terminal device can be managed more accurately.
本申请实施例提供了另一种通信方法,该方法可应用于图1或图2所示的通信系统中,可用于解决上述问题2。下面参阅图5所示的流程图,对该方法的流程进行具体说明。The embodiment of the present application provides another communication method, which can be applied to the communication system shown in FIG. 1 or FIG. 2 and can be used to solve the above problem 2. Referring to the flow chart shown in FIG. 5 , the flow of the method will be described in detail.
S501:控制面网元获取终端设备的设定移动信息。S501: The network element of the control plane acquires the setting movement information of the terminal device.
在本申请实施例中,控制面网元可以但不限于为以下之一:LMF、GMLC、NEF;该终端设备可以但不限于为UAV或无人驾驶汽车。当终端设备为UAV时,设定移动信息也可以称为设定飞行信息。In the embodiment of this application, the control plane network element may be, but not limited to, one of the following: LMF, GMLC, NEF; the terminal device may be, but not limited to, a UAV or an unmanned vehicle. When the terminal device is a UAV, setting movement information may also be referred to as setting flight information.
S502:控制面网元获取终端设备的位置信息。其中,位置信息用于表示终端设备的位置和/或移动速度。S502: The control plane network element acquires location information of the terminal device. Wherein, the location information is used to represent the location and/or moving speed of the terminal device.
S502的具体内容可参考S401,此处不再赘述。For specific content of S502, reference may be made to S401, which will not be repeated here.
另外,本申请对S501和S502的执行顺序不作限定,可以先执行S501,再执行S502;也可以先执行S502,再执行S501;还可以同时执行S501和S502。In addition, the present application does not limit the execution order of S501 and S502, S501 may be executed first, and then S502 may be executed; S502 may be executed first, and then S501 may be executed; S501 and S502 may be executed simultaneously.
S503:控制面网元根据设定移动信息和位置信息,向第二通信设备发送通知信息。其中,通知信息可用于指示位置信息相对于设定移动信息发生偏移。换句话说,当终端设备的位置信息相对设定移动信息发生偏移时,控制面网元可向第二通信设备发送该通知信息,通知第二通信设备发生如下事件:终端设备的位置信息相对于设定移动信息发生偏移。位置信息相对于设定移动信息发生偏移,还可以理解为,位置信息与设定移动信息不同,或者位置信息与设定移动信息中的任一位置信息都不同。S503: The control plane network element sends notification information to the second communication device according to the set movement information and location information. Wherein, the notification information may be used to indicate that the location information deviates from the set movement information. In other words, when the position information of the terminal device deviates from the set movement information, the control plane network element may send the notification information to the second communication device to notify the second communication device that the following event occurs: the position information of the terminal device is relatively Deviation occurs in setting mobile information. The location information is offset relative to the set movement information, which can also be understood as the location information is different from the set movement information, or the location information is different from any position information in the set movement information.
其中,第二通信设备可以为以下之一:AF、LCS客户端、终端设备。其中,AF和LCS客户端可作为USS。Wherein, the second communication device may be one of the following: AF, LCS client, and terminal device. Among them, AF and LCS clients can be used as USS.
另外,该通知信息可以为用于指示位置信息相对于设定移动信息发生偏移的消息,也可以为消息中的信元。具体地,当通知信息为信元时,通知信息可以复用现有消息中的信元,也可以是现有消息中的新的信元。例如,该信元可以为第一指示字段,当该字段取值为第一值时,可以指示终端设备的位置相对于设定移动信息发生偏移。又例如,该信元可以为第二指示字段,当该字段取值为第二值时,可以指示终端设备的移动速度相对于设定移动信息发生偏移。In addition, the notification information may be a message for indicating that the location information is offset relative to the set movement information, or may be an information element in the message. Specifically, when the notification information is an information element, the notification information may reuse an information element in an existing message, or may be a new information element in an existing message. For example, the information element may be a first indication field, and when the value of this field is the first value, it may indicate that the location of the terminal device deviates from the set movement information. For another example, the information element may be a second indication field, and when the value of this field is the second value, it may indicate that the moving speed of the terminal device deviates from the set moving information.
在实际应用中,发起定位请求的通信设备并不一定需要一直获取终端设备的位置信息。如上述场景1所述,当UAV按照预定飞行路径飞行时,USS并不需要频繁获取UAV的位 置信息。通过该方法,当终端设备的位置信息相对设定移动信息发生偏移时,控制面网元才向第二通信设备发送该通知信息,以便通知终端设备的位置信息相对于设定移动信息发生偏移。这样,无需每次获取到终端设备的位置信息就向第二通信设备发送位置信息,从而可以减少信令交互。In practical applications, the communication device that initiates the location request does not necessarily need to obtain the location information of the terminal device all the time. As mentioned in Scenario 1 above, when the UAV is flying according to the predetermined flight path, the USS does not need to frequently acquire the UAV’s position configuration information. With this method, when the position information of the terminal device deviates from the set movement information, the control plane network element sends the notification information to the second communication device, so as to notify the position information of the terminal device that the position information deviates from the set movement information. shift. In this way, it is not necessary to send the location information to the second communication device every time the location information of the terminal device is acquired, thereby reducing signaling interaction.
可选的,在S501中,控制面网元可通过如下方式获取终端设备的设定移动信息:控制面网元接收来自第一通信设备的设定移动信息。Optionally, in S501, the control plane network element may obtain the set movement information of the terminal device in the following manner: the control plane network element receives the set movement information from the first communication device.
其中,第一通信设备可以但不限于为以下之一:AMF、NEF、LCS客户端、AF。Wherein, the first communication device may be, but not limited to, one of the following: AMF, NEF, LCS client, and AF.
例如,当控制面网元为LMF时,第一通信设备为AMF。LMF可依次通过AMF、GMLC接收来自LCS客户端的设定移动信息;或者,LMF依次通过AMF、GMLC、NEF接收来自AF的设定移动信息。For example, when the control plane network element is an LMF, the first communication device is an AMF. The LMF may sequentially receive the set movement information from the LCS client through the AMF and the GMLC; or, the LMF may sequentially receive the set movement information from the AF through the AMF, the GMLC and the NEF.
又例如,当控制面网元为GLMC时,第一通信设备为NEF或LCS客户端。当第一通信设备为NEF时,GMLC可通过NEF接收来自AF的设定移动信息。For another example, when the control plane network element is a GLMC, the first communication device is a NEF or LCS client. When the first communication device is the NEF, the GMLC can receive the set movement information from the AF through the NEF.
再例如,当控制面网元为NEF时,第一通信设备为AF。For another example, when the control plane network element is an NEF, the first communication device is an AF.
另外,设定移动信息可以复用现有消息(例如,用于请求获取终端设备的位置信息的请求)中的信元,也可以是现有消息中的新的信元。In addition, setting the mobile information may reuse information elements in an existing message (for example, a request for obtaining location information of a terminal device), or may be a new information element in an existing message.
通过该方法,控制面网元可以方便的获得设定移动信息。Through this method, the control plane network element can conveniently obtain the setting movement information.
可选的,在图5所示方法的一种实施场景中,设定移动信息包括以下至少一项:Optionally, in an implementation scenario of the method shown in Figure 5, setting the movement information includes at least one of the following:
1、终端设备的设定移动路径:例如,预定移动路径上的一系列点迹信息或路径曲线信息。1. The set moving path of the terminal device: for example, a series of trace information or path curve information on the predetermined moving path.
2、终端设备在至少一个时间点的设定位置(也可称为终端设备在至少一个时间点上应到达的位置):例如,终端设备在时间点1上的设定地理位置1、在时间点2上的设定地理位置2等。终端设备在至少一个时间点的设定位置的表现形式可以为至少一个时间点和设定位置之间的对应关系表。2. The set position of the terminal device at at least one point in time (also referred to as the position that the terminal device should arrive at at least one point in time): for example, the set geographic location of the terminal device at time point 1, at time point 1 Set Geolocation 2 on point 2 etc. The representation form of the set position of the terminal device at at least one time point may be a correspondence table between at least one time point and the set position.
3、终端设备的设定移动速度:该设定移动速度可以是一个固定值,终端设备在移动过程中始终应以该设定移动速度移动。该设定移动速度也可以是一个变化的值,例如,随时间变化,或者根据终端设备所在的位置或位置范围变化。当设定移动速度为变化的值时,设定移动信息可包括设定移动速度和变化量(例如,时间,终端设备所在的位置或位置范围)之间的对应关系。3. The set moving speed of the terminal device: the set moving speed can be a fixed value, and the terminal device should always move at the set moving speed during the moving process. The set moving speed may also be a changing value, for example, changing with time, or changing according to the location or location range of the terminal device. When setting the moving speed as a variable value, setting the moving information may include setting a corresponding relationship between the moving speed and a change amount (for example, time, the location or location range of the terminal device).
4、终端设备的设定速度范围:该设定速度范围可以是一个固定的范围,终端设备在移动过程中始终应以该设定速度范围的速度移动。该设定速度范围也可以是一个变化的值,例如,随时间变化,或者根据终端设备所在的位置或位置范围变化。当设定速度范围为变化的值时,设定移动信息可包括设定速度范围和变化量(例如,时间,终端设备所在的位置或位置范围)之间的对应关系。4. The set speed range of the terminal device: the set speed range can be a fixed range, and the terminal device should always move at the speed of the set speed range during the moving process. The set speed range may also be a changing value, for example, changing with time, or changing according to the location or location range of the terminal device. When setting the speed range as a variable value, setting the movement information may include setting a correspondence between the speed range and the change amount (for example, time, the location of the terminal device or the location range).
该方法提供了多种设定移动信息,这样,控制面网元可根据设定移动信息灵活判断终端设备的位置信息相对于设定移动信息是否发生偏移。The method provides a variety of set movement information, so that the network element of the control plane can flexibly judge whether the location information of the terminal device deviates from the set movement information according to the set movement information.
可选的,在S503中,当位置信息与设定移动信息之间的偏移大于或等于第一阈值时,控制面网元可向第二通信设备发送通知信息。 Optionally, in S503, when the deviation between the location information and the set movement information is greater than or equal to the first threshold, the control plane network element may send notification information to the second communication device.
其中,第二通信设备可以为以下之一:AF、LCS客户端、终端设备。Wherein, the second communication device may be one of the following: AF, LCS client, and terminal device.
可选的,第一阈值可包括以下至少一项:终端设备的位置与设定移动路径之间的最大偏移值,终端设备的位置与设定位置之间的最大偏移值,终端设备的移动速度与设定移动速度之间的最大偏移值,终端设备的移动速度与设定速度范围之间的最大偏移值。Optionally, the first threshold may include at least one of the following: a maximum offset value between the position of the terminal device and the set moving path, a maximum offset value between the position of the terminal device and the set position, and a maximum offset value between the position of the terminal device and the set position. The maximum offset value between the moving speed and the set moving speed, and the maximum offset value between the moving speed of the terminal device and the set speed range.
下面举例说明“当位置信息与设定移动信息之间的偏移大于或等于第一阈值时,控制面网元可向第二通信设备发送通知信息”。The following example illustrates "when the deviation between the location information and the set movement information is greater than or equal to the first threshold, the control plane network element may send notification information to the second communication device".
例如,当设定移动信息为终端设备的设定移动路径时,位置信息可表示终端设备的位置,第一阈值为终端设备的位置与设定移动路径之间的最大偏移值。如果位置信息表示的位置与设定移动路径之间的最短距离大于或等于第一阈值,控制面网元可向第二通信设备发送通知信息,以通知第二通信设备终端设备的位置相对于设定移动信息发生偏移。For example, when the set movement information is the set movement route of the terminal device, the location information may indicate the position of the terminal device, and the first threshold is the maximum offset value between the position of the terminal device and the set movement route. If the shortest distance between the location indicated by the location information and the set moving path is greater than or equal to the first threshold, the control plane network element may send notification information to the second communication device to notify the second communication device that the location of the terminal device is relative to the set path. The fixed mobile information is offset.
又例如,当设定移动信息为终端设备在至少一个时间点的设定位置时,位置信息可表示终端设备在第一时间点的位置,第一阈值为终端设备的位置与设定位置之间的最大偏移值。如果终端设备在第一时间点的位置与终端设备在第一时间点的设定位置之间的距离大于或等于第一阈值,控制面网元可向第二通信设备发送通知信息,以通知第二通信设备终端设备的位置相对于设定移动信息发生偏移。For another example, when the mobile information is set as the set position of the terminal device at at least one time point, the position information may indicate the position of the terminal device at the first time point, and the first threshold is the distance between the position of the terminal device and the set position. The maximum offset value of . If the distance between the position of the terminal device at the first time point and the set position of the terminal device at the first time point is greater than or equal to the first threshold, the control plane network element may send notification information to the second communication device to notify the second communication device The position of the terminal device of the second communication device deviates relative to the set movement information.
再例如,当设定移动信息为终端设备的设定移动速度,且该设定移动速度为固定值时,位置信息可表示终端设备的移动速度,第一阈值为终端设备的移动速度与设定移动速度之间的最大偏移值。如果位置信息所表示的移动速度与终端设备的设定移动速度之间的差值大于或等于第一阈值,控制面网元可向第二通信设备发送通知信息,以通知第二通信设备终端设备的移动速度相对于设定移动信息发生偏移。For another example, when the set moving information is the set moving speed of the terminal device, and the set moving speed is a fixed value, the location information may represent the moving speed of the terminal device, and the first threshold value is the difference between the moving speed of the terminal device and the setting value. The maximum offset between movement speeds. If the difference between the moving speed represented by the location information and the set moving speed of the terminal device is greater than or equal to the first threshold, the control plane network element may send notification information to the second communication device to notify the second communication device of the terminal device The movement speed of is offset from the set movement information.
再例如,当设定移动信息为终端设备的设定移动速度,且该设定移动速度为随时间变化的值时,位置信息可表示终端设备在第一时间段的移动速度,第一阈值为终端设备的移动速度与设定移动速度之间的最大偏移值。如果终端设备在第一时间段的移动速度与终端设备在第一时间段的设定移动速度之间的差值大于或等于第一阈值,控制面网元可向第二通信设备发送通知信息,以通知第二通信设备终端设备的移动速度相对于设定移动信息发生偏移。For another example, when the set movement information is the set movement speed of the terminal device, and the set movement speed is a value that changes with time, the location information may indicate the movement speed of the terminal device in the first time period, and the first threshold is The maximum offset value between the mobile speed of the terminal device and the set mobile speed. If the difference between the moving speed of the terminal device in the first time period and the set moving speed of the terminal device in the first time period is greater than or equal to the first threshold, the control plane network element may send notification information to the second communication device, Notifying the second communication device that the moving speed of the terminal device deviates from the set moving information.
再例如,当设定移动信息为终端设备的设定移动速度,且该设定移动速度为随位置变化的值时,位置信息可表示终端设备在第一位置的移动速度,第一阈值为终端设备的移动速度与设定移动速度之间的最大偏移值。如果终端设备在第一位置的移动速度与终端设备在第一位置的设定移动速度之间的差值大于或等于第一阈值,控制面网元可向第二通信设备发送通知信息,以通知第二通信设备终端设备的移动速度相对于设定移动信息发生偏移。For another example, when the set movement information is the set movement speed of the terminal device, and the set movement speed is a value that changes with the location, the location information may indicate the movement speed of the terminal device at the first location, and the first threshold is the terminal The maximum offset between the device's movement speed and the set movement speed. If the difference between the moving speed of the terminal device at the first location and the set moving speed of the terminal device at the first location is greater than or equal to the first threshold, the control plane network element may send notification information to the second communication device to notify The moving speed of the terminal device of the second communication device deviates from the set moving information.
再例如,当设定移动信息为终端设备的设定速度范围,且该设定速度范围为固定值时,位置信息可表示终端设备的移动速度,第一阈值为终端设备的移动速度与设定速度范围之间的最大偏移值。如果位置信息所表示的移动速度与终端设备的设定速度范围之间的偏移大于或等于第一阈值,控制面网元可向第二通信设备发送通知信息,以通知第二通信设备终端设备的移动速度相对于设定移动信息发生偏移。For another example, when the set movement information is the set speed range of the terminal device, and the set speed range is a fixed value, the location information may represent the moving speed of the terminal device, and the first threshold is the moving speed of the terminal device and the setting Maximum offset value between velocity ranges. If the deviation between the moving speed represented by the location information and the set speed range of the terminal device is greater than or equal to the first threshold, the control plane network element may send notification information to the second communication device to notify the second communication device of the terminal device The movement speed of is offset from the set movement information.
再例如,当设定移动信息为终端设备的设定速度范围,且该设定速度范围为随时间变化的值时,位置信息可表示终端设备在第二时间段的移动速度,第一阈值为终端设备的移动速度与设定速度范围之间的最大偏移值。如果终端设备在第二时间段的移动速度与终端设备在第二时间段的设定速度范围之间的偏移大于或等于第一阈值,控制面网元可向第二 通信设备发送通知信息,以通知第二通信设备终端设备的移动速度相对于设定移动信息发生偏移。For another example, when the movement information is set as the set speed range of the terminal device, and the set speed range is a value that changes with time, the location information may indicate the moving speed of the terminal device in the second time period, and the first threshold is The maximum offset value between the mobile speed of the terminal device and the set speed range. If the deviation between the moving speed of the terminal device in the second time period and the set speed range of the terminal device in the second time period is greater than or equal to the first threshold, the network element on the control plane may report to the second The communication device sends notification information to notify the second communication device that the movement speed of the terminal device deviates from the set movement information.
再例如,当设定移动信息为终端设备的设定速度范围,且该设定速度范围为随位置变化的值时,位置信息可表示终端设备在第二位置的移动速度,第一阈值为终端设备的移动速度与设定速度范围之间的最大偏移值。如果终端设备在第二位置的移动速度与终端设备在第二位置的设定速度范围之间的偏移大于或等于第一阈值,控制面网元可向第二通信设备发送通知信息,以通知第二通信设备终端设备的移动速度相对于设定移动信息发生偏移。For another example, when the movement information is set as the set speed range of the terminal device, and the set speed range is a value that changes with the location, the location information may indicate the moving speed of the terminal device at the second location, and the first threshold is the terminal The maximum offset between the device's moving speed and the set speed range. If the deviation between the moving speed of the terminal device at the second location and the set speed range of the terminal device at the second location is greater than or equal to the first threshold, the control plane network element may send notification information to the second communication device to notify The moving speed of the terminal device of the second communication device deviates from the set moving information.
再例如,当设定移动信息包括:终端设备的设定移动路径和终端设备的设定移动速度,且该设定移动速度为固定值时,位置信息可表示终端设备的位置和移动速度;第一阈值包括:终端设备的位置与设定移动路径之间的最大偏移值(下面简称为第一最大偏移值)、终端设备的移动速度与设定移动速度之间的最大偏移值(下面简称为第二最大偏移值)。如果位置信息所表示的位置与设定移动路径之间的最短距离大于或等于第一最大偏移值,位置信息所表示的移动速度与终端设备的设定移动速度之间的差值大于或等于第二最大偏移值,控制面网元可向第二通信设备发送通知信息,以通知第二通信设备终端设备的位置和移动速度相对于设定移动信息发生偏移。For another example, when the set movement information includes: the set movement path of the terminal device and the set movement speed of the terminal device, and the set movement speed is a fixed value, the location information may represent the position and movement speed of the terminal device; A threshold value includes: the maximum offset value between the position of the terminal device and the set moving path (hereinafter referred to as the first maximum offset value), the maximum offset value between the terminal device's moving speed and the set moving speed ( Hereinafter, it is referred to as the second maximum offset value for short). If the shortest distance between the position represented by the position information and the set moving path is greater than or equal to the first maximum offset value, the difference between the moving speed represented by the position information and the set moving speed of the terminal device is greater than or equal to For the second maximum offset value, the control plane network element may send notification information to the second communication device to notify the second communication device that the position and moving speed of the terminal device deviate from the set moving information.
可选的,在图5所示方法的一种实施场景中,在向第二通信设备发送通知信息之前,上述方法还包括:Optionally, in an implementation scenario of the method shown in FIG. 5, before sending the notification information to the second communication device, the above method further includes:
S504:控制面网元可获取第一阈值。S504: The control plane network element may obtain the first threshold.
在一些可能的方式中,控制面网元可从第二通信设备获取第一阈值。其中,第一阈值可以复用现有消息(例如,用于请求获取终端设备的位置信息的请求)中的信元,也可以是现有消息中的新的信元。另外,第一阈值和预定移动信息可以包含在同一个消息中,也可以包含在不同的消息中。In some possible manners, the control plane network element may acquire the first threshold from the second communication device. Wherein, the first threshold may reuse information elements in an existing message (for example, a request for obtaining location information of a terminal device), or may be a new information element in an existing message. In addition, the first threshold and the predetermined movement information may be included in the same message, or may be included in different messages.
在另一些可能的方式中,控制面网元可获取预先配置的第一阈值。也就是说,第一阈值是预先配置在控制面网元中的,例如,预先存储在控制面网元的内存中。In some other possible manners, the control plane network element may obtain a pre-configured first threshold. That is to say, the first threshold is preconfigured in the network element of the control plane, for example, stored in memory of the network element of the control plane in advance.
另外,本申请对S501、S502和S504的执行顺序不作限定。例如,可以先执行S501和S504,再执行S502;也可以先执行S502,再执行S501和S504;还可以同时执行S501,S502和S504;还可以按照如下顺序执行:S501、S504、S502。In addition, the present application does not limit the execution sequence of S501, S502 and S504. For example, S501 and S504 can be executed first, and then S502; or S502 can be executed first, and then S501 and S504 can be executed; S501, S502, and S504 can also be executed at the same time; and S501, S504, and S502 can also be executed in the following order.
可选的,在图5所示方法的一种实施场景中,上述方法还包括:Optionally, in an implementation scenario of the method shown in Figure 5, the above method further includes:
S505:控制面网元向第二通信设备发送终端设备的位置信息。S505: The control plane network element sends the location information of the terminal device to the second communication device.
下面对“控制面网元向第二通信设备发送终端设备的位置信息”可能的实现方式进行说明。A possible implementation manner of "the control plane network element sending the location information of the terminal device to the second communication device" will be described below.
实现方式一:当终端设备的位置信息与设定移动信息之间的偏移大于或等于第一阈值时,控制面网元向第二通信设备发送终端设备的位置信息。Implementation way 1: When the offset between the location information of the terminal device and the set movement information is greater than or equal to a first threshold, the control plane network element sends the location information of the terminal device to the second communication device.
下面对本实现方式一进行举例说明。The first implementation mode is described below with an example.
例如,当设定移动信息为终端设备的设定移动路径时,位置信息可表示终端设备的位置,第一阈值为终端设备的位置与设定移动路径之间的最大偏移值。如果位置信息所表示的位置与设定移动路径之间的最短距离大于或等于第一阈值,控制面网元可向第二通信设备发送终端设备的位置信息。 For example, when the set movement information is the set movement route of the terminal device, the location information may indicate the position of the terminal device, and the first threshold is the maximum offset value between the position of the terminal device and the set movement route. If the shortest distance between the location indicated by the location information and the set moving route is greater than or equal to the first threshold, the control plane network element may send the location information of the terminal device to the second communication device.
又例如,当设定移动信息为终端设备在至少一个时间点的设定位置时,位置信息可表示终端设备在第一时间点的位置,第一阈值为终端设备的位置与设定位置之间的最大偏移值。如果终端设备在第一时间点的位置与终端设备在第一时间点的设定位置之间的距离大于或等于第一阈值,控制面网元可向第二通信设备发送终端设备的位置信息。For another example, when the mobile information is set as the set position of the terminal device at at least one time point, the position information may indicate the position of the terminal device at the first time point, and the first threshold is the distance between the position of the terminal device and the set position. The maximum offset value of . If the distance between the position of the terminal device at the first time point and the set position of the terminal device at the first time point is greater than or equal to the first threshold, the control plane network element may send the position information of the terminal device to the second communication device.
再例如,当设定移动信息为终端设备的设定移动速度,且该设定移动速度为固定值时,位置信息可表示终端设备的移动速度,第一阈值为终端设备的移动速度与设定移动速度之间的最大偏移值。如果位置信息所表示的移动速度与终端设备的设定移动速度之间的差值大于或等于第一阈值,控制面网元可向第二通信设备发送终端设备的位置信息。For another example, when the set moving information is the set moving speed of the terminal device, and the set moving speed is a fixed value, the location information may represent the moving speed of the terminal device, and the first threshold value is the difference between the moving speed of the terminal device and the setting value. The maximum offset between movement speeds. If the difference between the moving speed represented by the location information and the set moving speed of the terminal device is greater than or equal to the first threshold, the control plane network element may send the location information of the terminal device to the second communication device.
再例如,当设定移动信息为终端设备的设定移动速度,且该设定移动速度为随时间变化的值时,位置信息可表示终端设备在第一时间段的移动速度,第一阈值为终端设备的移动速度与设定移动速度之间的最大偏移值。如果终端设备在第一时间段的移动速度与终端设备在第一时间段的设定移动速度之间的差值大于或等于第一阈值,控制面网元可向第二通信设备发送终端设备的位置信息。For another example, when the set movement information is the set movement speed of the terminal device, and the set movement speed is a value that changes with time, the location information may indicate the movement speed of the terminal device in the first time period, and the first threshold is The maximum offset value between the mobile speed of the terminal device and the set mobile speed. If the difference between the moving speed of the terminal device in the first time period and the set moving speed of the terminal device in the first time period is greater than or equal to the first threshold, the control plane network element may send the terminal device's moving speed to the second communication device location information.
再例如,当设定移动信息为终端设备的设定移动速度,且该设定移动速度为随位置变化的值时,位置信息可表示终端设备在第一位置的移动速度,第一阈值为终端设备的移动速度与设定移动速度之间的最大偏移值。如果终端设备在第一位置的移动速度与终端设备在第一位置的设定移动速度之间的差值大于或等于第一阈值,控制面网元可向第二通信设备发送终端设备的位置信息。For another example, when the set movement information is the set movement speed of the terminal device, and the set movement speed is a value that changes with the location, the location information may indicate the movement speed of the terminal device at the first location, and the first threshold is the terminal The maximum offset between the device's movement speed and the set movement speed. If the difference between the moving speed of the terminal device at the first location and the set moving speed of the terminal device at the first location is greater than or equal to the first threshold, the control plane network element may send the location information of the terminal device to the second communication device .
再例如,当设定移动信息为终端设备的设定速度范围,且该设定速度范围为固定值时,位置信息可表示终端设备的移动速度,第一阈值为终端设备的移动速度与设定速度范围之间的最大偏移值。如果位置信息所表示的移动速度与终端设备的设定速度范围之间的偏移大于或等于第一阈值,控制面网元可向第二通信设备发送终端设备的位置信息。For another example, when the set movement information is the set speed range of the terminal device, and the set speed range is a fixed value, the location information may represent the moving speed of the terminal device, and the first threshold is the moving speed of the terminal device and the setting Maximum offset value between velocity ranges. If the deviation between the moving speed represented by the location information and the set speed range of the terminal device is greater than or equal to the first threshold, the control plane network element may send the location information of the terminal device to the second communication device.
再例如,当设定移动信息为终端设备的设定速度范围,且该设定速度范围为随时间变化的值时,位置信息可表示终端设备在第二时间段的移动速度,第一阈值为终端设备的移动速度与设定速度范围之间的最大偏移值。如果终端设备在第二时间段的移动速度与终端设备在第二时间段的设定速度范围之间的偏移大于或等于第一阈值,控制面网元可向第二通信设备发送终端设备的位置信息。For another example, when the movement information is set as the set speed range of the terminal device, and the set speed range is a value that changes with time, the location information may indicate the moving speed of the terminal device in the second time period, and the first threshold is The maximum offset value between the mobile speed of the terminal device and the set speed range. If the deviation between the moving speed of the terminal device in the second time period and the set speed range of the terminal device in the second time period is greater than or equal to the first threshold, the control plane network element may send the terminal device's moving speed to the second communication device location information.
再例如,当设定移动信息为终端设备的设定速度范围,且该设定速度范围为随位置变化的值时,位置信息可表示终端设备在第二位置的移动速度,第一阈值为终端设备的移动速度与设定速度范围之间的最大偏移值。如果终端设备在第二位置的移动速度与终端设备在第二位置的设定速度范围之间的偏移大于或等于第一阈值,控制面网元可向第二通信设备发送终端设备的位置信息。For another example, when the movement information is set as the set speed range of the terminal device, and the set speed range is a value that changes with the location, the location information may indicate the moving speed of the terminal device at the second location, and the first threshold is the terminal The maximum offset between the device's moving speed and the set speed range. If the deviation between the moving speed of the terminal device at the second location and the set speed range of the terminal device at the second location is greater than or equal to the first threshold, the control plane network element may send the location information of the terminal device to the second communication device .
再例如,当设定移动信息包括:终端设备的设定移动路径和终端设备的设定移动速度,且该设定移动速度为固定值时,位置信息可表示终端设备的位置和移动速度;第一阈值包括:终端设备的位置与设定移动路径之间的最大偏移值(下面简称为第一最大偏移值),和终端设备的移动速度与设定移动速度之间的最大偏移值(下面简称为第二最大偏移值)。如果位置信息所表示的位置与设定移动路径之间的最短距离大于或等于第一最大偏移值,位置信息所表示的移动速度与终端设备的设定移动速度之间的差值大于或等于第二最大偏移值,控制面网元可向第二通信设备发送终端设备的位置信息。For another example, when the set movement information includes: the set movement path of the terminal device and the set movement speed of the terminal device, and the set movement speed is a fixed value, the location information may represent the position and movement speed of the terminal device; A threshold includes: the maximum offset value between the position of the terminal device and the set moving path (hereinafter referred to as the first maximum offset value), and the maximum offset value between the moving speed of the terminal device and the set moving speed (hereinafter referred to as the second maximum offset value for short). If the shortest distance between the position represented by the position information and the set moving path is greater than or equal to the first maximum offset value, the difference between the moving speed represented by the position information and the set moving speed of the terminal device is greater than or equal to For the second maximum offset value, the control plane network element may send the location information of the terminal device to the second communication device.
另外,控制面网元可通过现有的消息(例如,确定定位响应、提供位置信息响应、LCS 服务响应、用于通知定位结果的通知消息等中的至少一个)向第二通信设备发送终端设备的位置信息,也可以通过新的消息向第二通信设备发送终端设备的位置信息。In addition, the control plane network elements can pass existing messages (for example, determine location response, provide location information response, LCS At least one of the service response, the notification message for notifying the positioning result, etc.) sends the location information of the terminal device to the second communication device, or sends the location information of the terminal device to the second communication device through a new message.
此外,当本实现方式一和S503结合时,本申请对控制面网元发送终端设备的位置信息和通知信息的先后顺序不作限制。例如,控制面网元可先发送终端设备的位置信息,再发送通知信息;也可以先发送通知信息,再发送位置信息;还可以同时发送位置信息和通知信息。In addition, when this implementation mode 1 is combined with S503, this application does not limit the order in which the control plane network element sends the location information and notification information of the terminal device. For example, the control plane network element may send the location information of the terminal device first, and then send the notification information; it may also send the notification information first, and then send the location information; or it may send the location information and the notification information at the same time.
在该实现方式一中,当终端设备的位置信息与设定移动信息之间的偏移大于或等于第一阈值时,控制面网元不但向第二通信设备用于指示位置信息相对于设定移动信息发生偏移的通知信息,还发送终端设备的位置信息。这样,第二通信设备可根据位置信息对终端设备的移动进行有效管理。In the first implementation, when the deviation between the location information of the terminal device and the set movement information is greater than or equal to the first threshold, the control plane network element not only indicates to the second communication device that the location information is relative to the set The notification information of the deviation of the mobile information also sends the location information of the terminal equipment. In this way, the second communication device can effectively manage the movement of the terminal device according to the location information.
实现方式二:控制面网元周期性的向第二通信设备发送终端设备的位置信息。Implementation mode 2: The control plane network element periodically sends the location information of the terminal device to the second communication device.
在实现方式二中,控制面网元可执行A1-A2的操作。In the second implementation manner, the control plane network element can perform the operations of A1-A2.
A1:控制面网元获取用于指示第一周期的信息。A1: The control plane network element acquires information indicating the first period.
可选的,在A1中,控制面网元可通过如下方式获取用于指示第一周期的信息:控制面网元接收来自第一通信设备的用于指示第一周期的信息。Optionally, in A1, the control plane network element may acquire the information indicating the first period in the following manner: the control plane network element receives the information indicating the first period from the first communication device.
第一周期可以表示控制面网元发送终端设备的位置信息的周期。其中,第一周期与终端设备的定位周期不同,例如,第一周期可以大于终端设备的定位周期。The first period may indicate a period in which the control plane network element sends the location information of the terminal device. Wherein, the first period is different from the positioning period of the terminal device, for example, the first period may be greater than the positioning period of the terminal device.
用于指示第一周期的信息可以直接指示第一周期,例如,用于指示第一周期的信息为第一周期(例如,200ms)。用于指示第一周期的信息也可以间接指示第一周期,例如,当用于指示第一周期的信息的值为5时,间接指示第一周期为200ms。The information used to indicate the first period may directly indicate the first period, for example, the information used to indicate the first period is the first period (for example, 200ms). The information for indicating the first period may also indirectly indicate the first period. For example, when the value of the information for indicating the first period is 5, it indirectly indicates that the first period is 200ms.
另外,用于指示第一周期的信息可以为用于指示第一周期的消息,也可以为消息中的信元。具体地,当用于指示第一周期的信息为信元时,用于指示第一周期的信息可以复用现有消息中的信元,也可以是现有消息中的新的信元。例如,该信元可以为第三指示字段,当该字段取值为第三值时,可以指示第一周期。In addition, the information used to indicate the first period may be a message used to indicate the first period, or may be an information element in the message. Specifically, when the information used to indicate the first cycle is an information element, the information used to indicate the first cycle may multiplex an information element in an existing message, or may be a new information element in an existing message. For example, the information element may be a third indication field, and when the value of this field is a third value, it may indicate the first period.
此外,本申请对控制面网元接收终端设备的设定移动信息(即S501)和用于指示第一周期的信息的先后顺序不作限制。例如,控制面网元可先接收终端设备的设定移动信息,再接收用于指示第一周期的信息;也可以先接收用于指示第一周期的信息,再接收设定移动信息;还可以同时接收设定移动信息和用于指示第一周期的信息。In addition, the present application does not limit the order in which the network element of the control plane receives the setting movement information of the terminal device (ie S501 ) and the information used to indicate the first cycle. For example, the network element on the control plane may first receive the set movement information of the terminal equipment, and then receive the information indicating the first period; it may also receive the information indicating the first period first, and then receive the set movement information; The setting movement information and the information indicating the first period are received simultaneously.
A2:控制面网元根据第一周期,向第二通信设备发送终端设备的位置信息。A2: The control plane network element sends the location information of the terminal device to the second communication device according to the first period.
在一些可能的方式中,控制面网元以第一周期向第二通信设备发送终端设备的位置信息。例如,第二定位周期为10ms,第一周期为200ms。控制面网元通过第二定位周期获取终端设备的位置信息。假设第二定位周期和第一周期的起始时刻均为时刻0。控制面网元在一个第一周期内可获取终端设备的20个位置信息,并在时刻0+200ms的时刻,向第二通信设备发送最新的位置信息。In some possible manners, the control plane network element sends the location information of the terminal device to the second communication device in a first period. For example, the second positioning period is 10ms, and the first period is 200ms. The control plane network element acquires the location information of the terminal device through the second positioning period. Assume that the start times of the second positioning period and the first period are both time 0. The control plane network element can obtain 20 pieces of location information of the terminal device in a first period, and send the latest location information to the second communication device at time 0+200ms.
在另一些可能的方式中,控制面网元可根据第一周期和上一次发送位置信息和/或通知信息的时间,向第二通信设备发送终端设备的位置信息。In some other possible manners, the control plane network element may send the location information of the terminal device to the second communication device according to the first period and the last time when the location information and/or notification information was sent.
例如,控制面网元在接收到用于指示第一周期的信息之后,可以将定时器归零,并启动定时器。在定时器工作过程中,若控制面网元向第二通信设备发送位置信息和/或通知信息(例如,控制面网元执行S503),则控制面网元将定时器归零,重新启动该定时器。当定时器的时间到达第一周期时,控制面网元向第二通信设备发送终端设备的位置信息。 For example, the control plane network element may reset the timer to zero and start the timer after receiving the information indicating the first period. During the working process of the timer, if the control plane network element sends location information and/or notification information to the second communication device (for example, the control plane network element executes S503), the control plane network element resets the timer to zero and restarts the timer. When the time of the timer reaches the first period, the control plane network element sends the location information of the terminal device to the second communication device.
另外,在步骤A2中,控制面网元可通过现有的消息(例如,确定定位响应、提供位置信息响应、LCS服务响应、用于通知定位结果的通知消息等中的至少一个)向第二通信设备发送终端设备的位置信息,也可以通过新的消息向第二通信设备发送终端设备的位置信息。In addition, in step A2, the control plane network element may send the second The communication device sends the location information of the terminal device, and may also send the location information of the terminal device to the second communication device through a new message.
在该实现方式二中,控制面网元根据第一周期向第二通信设备发送位置信息。这样,不管终端设备的位置信息相对于设定移动信息是否发生偏移,第二通信设备都可以获得终端设备的位置信息,从而避免单纯采用实现方式一时第二通信设备可能长时间接收不到终端设备的位置信息,进而使得第二通信设备可根据位置信息对终端设备的移动进行有效管理。In the second implementation manner, the control plane network element sends the location information to the second communication device according to the first period. In this way, regardless of whether the location information of the terminal device deviates from the set mobile information, the second communication device can obtain the location information of the terminal device, thereby avoiding that the second communication device may not be able to receive the terminal device for a long time when simply adopting the first implementation method. The location information of the device, so that the second communication device can effectively manage the movement of the terminal device according to the location information.
本申请实施例提供了又一种通信方法,该方法可应用于图1或图2所示的通信系统中,可用于解决上述问题2。下面参阅图6所示的流程图,对该方法的流程进行具体说明。The embodiment of the present application provides another communication method, which can be applied to the communication system shown in FIG. 1 or FIG. 2 and can be used to solve the above-mentioned problem 2. Referring to the flow chart shown in FIG. 6 , the flow of the method will be described in detail.
S601:控制面网元获取用于指示第一周期的信息。S601: The control plane network element acquires information used to indicate the first cycle.
具体内容可参考图5所示方法的步骤A1,此处不再赘述。For specific content, reference may be made to step A1 of the method shown in FIG. 5 , which will not be repeated here.
S602:控制面网元根据第一周期,向第二通信设备发送终端设备的位置信息。其中,第一周期大于终端设备的定位周期。S602: The control plane network element sends the location information of the terminal device to the second communication device according to the first period. Wherein, the first period is greater than the positioning period of the terminal device.
在一些可能的方式中,控制面网元以第一周期向第二通信设备发送终端设备的位置信息。具体内容可参考图5所示方法中的步骤A2,此处不再赘述。In some possible manners, the control plane network element sends the location information of the terminal device to the second communication device in a first period. For specific content, refer to step A2 in the method shown in FIG. 5 , which will not be repeated here.
在另一些可能的方式中,控制面网元可根据第一周期和上一次发送位置信息和/或通知信息的时间,向第二通信设备发送终端设备的位置信息。具体内容可参考图5所示方法中的步骤A2,此处不再赘述。In some other possible manners, the control plane network element may send the location information of the terminal device to the second communication device according to the first period and the last time when the location information and/or notification information was sent. For specific content, refer to step A2 in the method shown in FIG. 5 , which will not be repeated here.
通过该方法,控制面网元根据大于终端设备的定位周期的第一周期向第二通信设备发送位置信息。这样,不管终端设备的位置信息相对于设定移动信息是否发生偏移,第二通信设备都可以获得终端设备的位置信息,从而使得第二通信设备可根据位置信息对终端设备的移动进行有效管理。With this method, the control plane network element sends location information to the second communication device according to the first cycle that is longer than the positioning cycle of the terminal device. In this way, regardless of whether the location information of the terminal device deviates from the set movement information, the second communication device can obtain the location information of the terminal device, so that the second communication device can effectively manage the movement of the terminal device according to the location information .
另外,如前所述,发起定位请求的通信设备并不一定需要一直获取终端设备的位置信息。通过该方法,控制面网元扩大上报位置信息的周期,从而可以减少通信设备之间的信令交互。In addition, as mentioned above, the communication device that initiates the location request does not necessarily need to obtain the location information of the terminal device all the time. Through this method, the network element of the control plane expands the period of reporting location information, thereby reducing the signaling interaction between communication devices.
可选的,在图6所示方法的一种实施场景中,该方法还包括:Optionally, in an implementation scenario of the method shown in Figure 6, the method further includes:
B1:控制面网元获取终端设备的设定移动信息。B1: The network element of the control plane obtains the setting movement information of the terminal device.
B2:控制面网元获取终端设备的位置信息。其中,位置信息用于表示终端设备的位置和/或移动速度。B2: The control plane network element obtains the location information of the terminal device. Wherein, the location information is used to represent the location and/or moving speed of the terminal device.
B3:控制面网元根据设定移动信息和位置信息,向第二通信设备发送通知信息。B3: The control plane network element sends notification information to the second communication device according to the set movement information and location information.
其中,B1-B3的具体内容可参考S501-S503,此处不再赘述。Wherein, for the specific content of B1-B3, reference may be made to S501-S503, which will not be repeated here.
可选的,在图6所示方法的一种实施场景中,在向第二通信设备发送通知信息之前,上述方法还包括:Optionally, in an implementation scenario of the method shown in FIG. 6, before sending the notification information to the second communication device, the above method further includes:
B4:控制面网元可获取第一阈值。B4: The control plane network element may obtain the first threshold.
其中,B4的具体内容可参考S504,此处不再赘述。Wherein, for the specific content of B4, reference may be made to S504, which will not be repeated here.
可选的,在图6所示方法的一种实施场景中,上述方法还包括: Optionally, in an implementation scenario of the method shown in Figure 6, the above method further includes:
B5:当终端设备的位置信息与设定移动信息之间的偏移大于或等于第一阈值时,控制面网元向第二通信设备发送终端设备的位置信息。B5: When the deviation between the location information of the terminal device and the set movement information is greater than or equal to the first threshold, the control plane network element sends the location information of the terminal device to the second communication device.
其中,B5的具体内容可参考S505中的实现方式一,此处不再赘述。Wherein, for the specific content of B5, reference may be made to the implementation manner 1 in S505, which will not be repeated here.
本申请实施例提供了再一种通信方法,该方法可以适用于图1或图2所示的通信系统中。该方法示出了图4所示方法的一种可能的示例。下面参阅图7所示的流程图,以终端设备为UAV,控制面网元为LMF,第二通信设备为作为USS的AF为例,对该方法进行说明。The embodiment of the present application provides another communication method, which can be applied to the communication system shown in FIG. 1 or FIG. 2 . This method shows one possible example of the method shown in FIG. 4 . Referring to the flowchart shown in FIG. 7 , the method will be described by taking the terminal device as a UAV, the control plane network element as an LMF, and the second communication device as an AF as a USS as an example.
S701:AF向NEF发送第一信息。S701: The AF sends first information to the NEF.
其中,该第一信息可包含至少一个定位周期与至少一个条件的对应关系。其中,至少一个条件包含第一条件,至少一个定位周期可包含第一定位周期。Wherein, the first information may include a corresponding relationship between at least one positioning period and at least one condition. Wherein, at least one condition includes the first condition, and at least one positioning cycle may include the first positioning cycle.
可选的,任一条件包括以下至少一项:Optionally, any condition includes at least one of the following:
条件A:UAV的位置位于第一预定位置范围内;Condition A: The position of the UAV is within the range of the first predetermined position;
条件B:UAV的位置位于第二预定位置范围外;Condition B: the position of the UAV is outside the range of the second predetermined position;
条件C:UAV的移动速度位于第一预定速度范围内;Condition C: the moving speed of the UAV is within the first predetermined speed range;
条件D:UAV的移动速度位于第二预定速度范围外。Condition D: The moving speed of the UAV is outside the second predetermined speed range.
其中,条件A的具体内容可参考图4所示方法中的条件1,只是将其中的第一位置范围替换为第一预定位置范围;条件B的具体内容可参考图4所示方法中的条件2,只是将其中的第二位置范围替换为第二预定位置范围;条件C的具体内容可参考图4所示方法中的条件3,只是将其中的第一速度范围替换为第一预定速度范围;条件D的具体内容可参考图4所示方法中的条件4,只是将其中的第二速度范围替换为第二预定速度范围,此处不再赘述。Wherein, the specific content of condition A can refer to the condition 1 in the method shown in Figure 4, but the first position range is replaced with the first predetermined position range; the specific content of condition B can refer to the condition in the method shown in Figure 4 2. Just replace the second position range with the second predetermined position range; the specific content of condition C can refer to condition 3 in the method shown in Figure 4, but replace the first speed range with the first predetermined speed range ; The specific content of condition D can refer to the condition 4 in the method shown in FIG.
对于不同的条件,第一预定位置范围、第二预定位置范围、第一预定速度范围、第二预定速度范围中的至少一项不同。例如,对于第一条件,第一预定位置范围为第一位置范围,第二预定位置范围为第二位置范围,第一预定速度范围为第一速度范围,第二预定速度范围为第二速度范围;对于第二条件,第一预定位置范围为第三位置范围,第二预定位置范围为第四位置范围,第一预定速度范围为第三速度范围;第二预定速度范围为第四速度范围。第一位置范围与第三位置范围不同,和/或第二位置范围与第四位置范围不同,和/或第一速度范围与第三速度范围不同,和/或第二速度范围与第四速度范围不同。For different conditions, at least one of the first predetermined position range, the second predetermined position range, the first predetermined speed range, and the second predetermined speed range is different. For example, for the first condition, the first predetermined position range is the first position range, the second predetermined position range is the second position range, the first predetermined speed range is the first speed range, and the second predetermined speed range is the second speed range ; For the second condition, the first predetermined position range is the third position range, the second predetermined position range is the fourth position range, the first predetermined speed range is the third speed range; the second predetermined speed range is the fourth speed range. The first position range is different from the third position range, and/or the second position range is different from the fourth position range, and/or the first speed range is different from the third speed range, and/or the second speed range is different from the fourth speed range The range is different.
下面举例说明至少一个定位周期与至少一个条件的对应关系。The correspondence between at least one positioning cycle and at least one condition is illustrated below with an example.
例如,第一条件为:UAV的位置位于第二区域内,第二区域为与禁飞区的距离大于或等于第一距离阈值的区域(换句话说,UAV的位置与禁飞区的距离大于或等于第一距离阈值);第二条件为:UAV的位置位于第三区域内,第三区域为与禁飞区的距离小于第一距离阈值的区域(换句话说,UAV的位置与禁飞区的距离小于第一距离阈值)。第一条件对应的定位周期(例如,25ms)大于第二条件对应的定位周期(例如,15ms)。这样,UAV越靠近禁飞区,定位周期越小;在UAV靠近禁飞区时以较小的定位周期获取更多的位置信息,从而可以对UAV进行有效控制,避免UAV飞入禁飞区内。For example, the first condition is: the position of the UAV is located in the second area, and the second area is an area whose distance from the no-fly zone is greater than or equal to the first distance threshold (in other words, the distance between the position of the UAV and the no-fly zone is greater than or equal to the first distance threshold); the second condition is: the position of the UAV is located in the third area, and the third area is an area less than the first distance threshold with the distance from the no-fly zone (in other words, the position of the UAV and the no-fly zone The distance of the zone is less than the first distance threshold). The positioning period corresponding to the first condition (for example, 25ms) is greater than the positioning period corresponding to the second condition (for example, 15ms). In this way, the closer the UAV is to the no-fly zone, the smaller the positioning cycle; when the UAV is close to the no-fly zone, more position information can be obtained with a smaller positioning cycle, so that the UAV can be effectively controlled to prevent the UAV from flying into the no-fly zone .
又例如,UAV的移动速度越小,定位周期越大。第一条件为:UAV的移动速度位于0~5km/h;第二条件为:UAV的移动速度位于20~30km/h。第一条件对应的定位周期小于第二条件对应的定位周期。UAV的移动速度较小时,USS不需要频繁获取位置信息;此时, 扩大定位周期可以减少信令交互,节约传输资源。For another example, the lower the moving speed of the UAV, the longer the positioning period. The first condition is: the moving speed of the UAV is in the range of 0-5 km/h; the second condition is: the moving speed of the UAV is in the range of 20-30 km/h. The positioning period corresponding to the first condition is smaller than the positioning period corresponding to the second condition. When the moving speed of the UAV is small, the USS does not need to obtain the position information frequently; at this time, Extending the positioning period can reduce signaling interaction and save transmission resources.
可选的,在S701中,AF还可向NEF发送用于指示默认定位周期(也可以称为初始定位周期,具体内容可参考图4所示方法中方式1中的第二定位周期)的信息。Optionally, in S701, the AF may also send information indicating the default positioning period (also called the initial positioning period, for details, refer to the second positioning period in the method 1 in the method shown in FIG. 4 ) to the NEF. .
可选的,第一信息和/或用于指示默认定位周期的信息可包含在用于请求获取UAV的位置信息的请求(例如,事件暴露订阅(NEF_EventExposure_subscribe)中。Optionally, the first information and/or the information used to indicate the default positioning period may be included in a request (for example, an event exposure subscription (NEF_EventExposure_subscribe)) for requesting to obtain the location information of the UAV.
S702:NEF向GMLC发送第一信息。S702: The NEF sends first information to the GMLC.
可选的,在S702中,NEF还可向GMLC发送用于指示默认定位周期的信息。Optionally, in S702, the NEF may also send information for indicating a default positioning period to the GMLC.
其中,第一信息和/或用于指示默认定位周期的信息可包含在用于请求获取UAV的位置信息的请求(例如,提供定位请求(Ngmlc_Location_ProvideLocation Request)中。Wherein, the first information and/or the information used to indicate the default location period may be included in the request for requesting the location information of the UAV (for example, provide a location request (Ngmlc_Location_ProvideLocation Request).
S703:GMLC向AMF发送第一信息。S703: The GMLC sends the first information to the AMF.
可选的,在S703中,GMLC还可向AMF发送用于指示默认定位周期的信息。Optionally, in S703, the GMLC may also send information for indicating a default positioning period to the AMF.
其中,第一信息和/或用于指示默认定位周期的信息可包含在用于请求获取UAV的位置信息的请求(例如,提供位置信息请求(Namf_Location_ProvidePositioningInfo Request))中。Wherein, the first information and/or the information used to indicate the default positioning cycle may be included in the request for requesting the location information of the UAV (for example, providing location information request (Namf_Location_ProvidePositioningInfo Request)).
S704:AMF向LMF发送第一信息。S704: The AMF sends the first information to the LMF.
可选的,在S704中,AMF还可向LMF发送用于指示默认定位周期的信息。Optionally, in S704, the AMF may also send information for indicating a default positioning period to the LMF.
其中,第一信息和/或用于指示默认定位周期的信息可包含在用于请求获取UAV的位置信息的请求(例如,确定定位请求(Nlmf_location_DetermineLocation Request))中。Wherein, the first information and/or the information for indicating the default positioning period may be included in the request for obtaining the location information of the UAV (for example, determine the location request (Nlmf_location_DetermineLocation Request)).
S705:LMF向UAV发送用于指示第二定位周期的信息。S705: The LMF sends information for indicating the second positioning period to the UAV.
在一些可能的实现方式中,第二定位周期可为上述默认定位周期。In some possible implementation manners, the second positioning period may be the aforementioned default positioning period.
在另一些可能的实现方式中,第二定位周期可为上述至少一个定位周期中最小的定位周期。此时,在S701-S704中,可不包含用于指示默认定位周期的信息。In some other possible implementation manners, the second positioning period may be the smallest positioning period among the above at least one positioning period. At this time, in S701-S704, the information for indicating the default positioning period may not be included.
可选的,在S705中,用于指示第二定位周期的信息可以承载在用于请求获取UAV的位置信息的请求(例如,LCS周期触发唤醒请求(LCS Periodic-Triggered Invoke Request))中。Optionally, in S705, the information used to indicate the second positioning period may be carried in the request for requesting to obtain the location information of the UAV (for example, LCS Periodic-Triggered Invoke Request (LCS Periodic-Triggered Invoke Request)).
S706:UAV根据第二定位周期向LMF上报该UAV的位置信息;相应地,LMF获取UAV的位置信息。S706: The UAV reports the location information of the UAV to the LMF according to the second positioning cycle; correspondingly, the LMF acquires the location information of the UAV.
其中,位置信息可以表示UAV的位置或移动速度。Wherein, the position information may represent the position or moving speed of the UAV.
S706的具体内容可参考S401,此处不再赘述。For the specific content of S706, reference may be made to S401, which will not be repeated here.
S707:LMF可通过GMLC向AF发送用于指示UAV当前使用的定位周期的信息。S707: The LMF may send information for indicating the positioning period currently used by the UAV to the AF through the GMLC.
其中,用于指示UAV当前使用的定位周期的信息可以包含在用于通知位置信息的通知消息(例如,Nlmf_Location_Notify)中。Wherein, the information used to indicate the positioning cycle currently used by the UAV may be included in a notification message (for example, Nlmf_Location_Notify) used to notify location information.
另外,该通知消息中还可包含UAV的定位结果(location result)。该定位结果可以包括:UAV的位置和/或移动速度。这样,AF在接收到定位结果后,可以判断该UAV是否按照预定飞行信息(例如,预定飞行路径)进行飞行,从而对UAV进行管理。In addition, the notification message may also include a location result of the UAV. The positioning result may include: the position and/or moving speed of the UAV. In this way, after receiving the positioning result, the AF can judge whether the UAV is flying according to the predetermined flight information (for example, a predetermined flight path), so as to manage the UAV.
可选的,S706和S707步骤的先后顺序不做限定。Optionally, the sequence of steps S706 and S707 is not limited.
S708:LMF根据获取的位置信息和第一信息,确定第一定位周期。S708: The LMF determines a first positioning period according to the acquired location information and first information.
S708的具体内容可参考S404,此处不再赘述。For specific content of S708, reference may be made to S404, which will not be repeated here.
S709:若LMF确定需要更新定位周期,例如,第一定位周期和第二定位周期不同时,LMF可向UAV发送用于指示第一定位周期(即更新后的定位周期)的信息。 S709: If the LMF determines that the positioning period needs to be updated, for example, when the first positioning period is different from the second positioning period, the LMF may send information indicating the first positioning period (ie, the updated positioning period) to the UAV.
S709的具体内容可参考S402,此处不再赘述。For the specific content of S709, reference may be made to S402, which will not be repeated here.
S710:各网元根据第一定位周期进行定位。S710: Each network element performs positioning according to the first positioning period.
S710的具体内容可参考S308,此处不再赘述。For specific content of S710, reference may be made to S308, which will not be repeated here.
另外,本申请对S707和S708的执行顺序不限。可以先执行S707,再执行S708;也可以先执行S708,再执行S707;还可以通知执行S707和S708。In addition, the present application does not limit the execution order of S707 and S708. S707 can be executed first, and then S708 can be executed; S708 can also be executed first, and then S707 can be executed; S707 and S708 can also be executed by notification.
此外,S709和S710是可选的步骤。例如,当第一定位周期和第二定位周期相同时,可以不执行S709和S710,各网元仍根据第二定位周期进行定位。In addition, S709 and S710 are optional steps. For example, when the first positioning period and the second positioning period are the same, S709 and S710 may not be performed, and each network element still performs positioning according to the second positioning period.
在一些可能的实现方式中,GMLC也可以根据位置信息和第一信息,确定第一定位周期。此时,在S703和S704中,GMLC可以不通过AMF向LMF发送第一信息。在S706中,LMF获取UAV的位置信息之后,通过AMF向GMLC发送UAV的位置信息。然后,GMLC参考S708中的方式确定第一定位周期;并通过AMF向LMF发送用于指示第一定位周期的信息。然后,LMF可以执行图7中后续的操作。In some possible implementation manners, the GMLC may also determine the first positioning period according to the location information and the first information. At this time, in S703 and S704, the GMLC may not send the first information to the LMF through the AMF. In S706, after acquiring the location information of the UAV, the LMF sends the location information of the UAV to the GMLC through the AMF. Then, the GMLC determines the first positioning period by referring to the manner in S708; and sends information indicating the first positioning period to the LMF through the AMF. Then, the LMF can perform subsequent operations in FIG. 7 .
在另一些可能的实现方式中,NEF也可以根据位置信息和第一信息,确定第一定位周期。此时,在S702-S704中,NEF可以不通过GMLC和AMF向LMF发送第一信息。在S706中,LMF获取UAV的位置信息之后,通过AMF和GMLC向NEF发送UAV的位置信息。然后,NEF参考S708中的方式确定第一定位周期;并通过GMLC和AMF向LMF发送用于指示第一定位周期的信息。然后,LMF可以执行图7中后续的操作。In some other possible implementation manners, the NEF may also determine the first positioning period according to the location information and the first information. At this time, in S702-S704, the NEF may not send the first information to the LMF through the GMLC and the AMF. In S706, after acquiring the location information of the UAV, the LMF sends the location information of the UAV to the NEF through the AMF and the GMLC. Then, the NEF determines the first positioning period by referring to the manner in S708; and sends information for indicating the first positioning period to the LMF through the GMLC and the AMF. Then, the LMF can perform subsequent operations in FIG. 7 .
通过该方法,控制面网元可获取至少一个条件和至少一个定位周期的对应关系,当终端设备的位置信息满足第一条件时,控制面网元即可对定位周期进行更新,无需重新发起定位流程,从而可以减少发起请求定位的通信设备(例如,终端设备或USS)与控制面网元之间的交互,简化定位流程。Through this method, the control plane network element can obtain the corresponding relationship between at least one condition and at least one positioning cycle. When the location information of the terminal device meets the first condition, the control plane network element can update the positioning cycle without re-initiating positioning. In this way, the interaction between the communication device (for example, the terminal device or USS) that initiates the positioning request and the control plane network element can be reduced, and the positioning process can be simplified.
本申请实施例提供了一种通信方法,该方法可以适用于图1或图2所示的通信系统中。该方法示出了图5或图6所示方法的一种可能的示例。下面参阅图8所示的流程图,以终端设备为UAV,控制面网元为GMLC,第二通信设备为作为USS的AF为例,对该方法进行说明。An embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, which can be applied to the communication system shown in FIG. 1 or FIG. 2 . This method shows a possible example of the method shown in FIG. 5 or FIG. 6 . Referring to the flowchart shown in FIG. 8 , the method will be described by taking the terminal device as a UAV, the control plane network element as a GMLC, and the second communication device as an AF as a USS as an example.
S801:AF向NEF发送UAV的设定移动信息。S801: The AF sends the set movement information of the UAV to the NEF.
其中,该设定移动信息可以包括以下至少一项:Wherein, the set mobile information may include at least one of the following:
UAV的设定移动路径;The set moving path of the UAV;
UAV在至少一个时间点的设定位置;A set position of the UAV at at least one point in time;
UAV的设定移动速度;The set movement speed of the UAV;
UAV的设定速度范围。The set speed range of the UAV.
上述设定移动信息的具体内容可参考对图5所示实施例中对“设定移动信息”的说明,此处不再赘述。For the specific content of setting the mobile information above, please refer to the description of “setting the mobile information” in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5 , which will not be repeated here.
可选的,在S801中,AF还可向NEF发送用于指示第一阈值的信息。第一阈值的具体内容可参考对S503的说明,此处不再赘述。Optionally, in S801, the AF may also send information for indicating the first threshold to the NEF. For the specific content of the first threshold, reference may be made to the description of S503, which will not be repeated here.
其中,设定移动信息和/或用于指示第一阈值的信息可包含在用于请求获取UAV的位置信息的请求(例如,事件暴露订阅(NEF_EventExposure_subscribe)中。Wherein, setting the movement information and/or the information used to indicate the first threshold may be included in the request (eg, NEF_EventExposure_subscribe) for requesting to obtain the location information of the UAV.
S802:NEF向GMLC发送UAV的设定移动信息。 S802: The NEF sends the set movement information of the UAV to the GMLC.
可选的,在S802中,NEF还可以向GMLC发送用于指示第一阈值的信息。Optionally, in S802, the NEF may also send information for indicating the first threshold to the GMLC.
其中,设定移动信息和/或用于指示第一阈值的信息可包含在用于请求获取UAV的位置信息的请求(例如,提供定位请求(Ngmlc_Location_ProvideLocation Request)中。Wherein, setting the movement information and/or the information for indicating the first threshold may be included in the request for requesting the location information of the UAV (for example, providing a location request (Ngmlc_Location_ProvideLocation Request).
S803:GMLC向AMF发送用于请求获取UAV的位置信息的请求(例如,提供位置信息请求(Namf_Location_ProvidePositioningInfo Request)),以请求获取UAV的位置信息。S803: The GMLC sends a request for obtaining the location information of the UAV to the AMF (for example, a request for providing location information (Namf_Location_ProvidePositioningInfo Request)), so as to request to obtain the location information of the UAV.
该步骤的具体内容可参考S304,此处不再赘述。For the specific content of this step, reference may be made to S304, which will not be repeated here.
S804:AMF选择LMF,并向LMF发送用于请求获取UAV的位置信息的请求(例如,确定定位请求(Nlmf_location_DetermineLocation Request))。S804: The AMF selects the LMF, and sends a request for obtaining the location information of the UAV to the LMF (for example, a determination location request (Nlmf_location_DetermineLocation Request)).
该步骤的具体内容可参考S306-S307,此处不再赘述。For the specific content of this step, reference may be made to S306-S307, which will not be repeated here.
S805:LMF向UAV发送定位请求(例如,LCS周期触发唤醒请求(LCS Periodic-Triggered Invoke Request))。S805: The LMF sends a positioning request to the UAV (for example, an LCS Periodic-Triggered Invoke Request (LCS Periodic-Triggered Invoke Request)).
可选地,如果是请求周期性定位,步骤S801-S805中的消息中都可以包含定位周期。Optionally, if periodic positioning is requested, the messages in steps S801-S805 may include a positioning period.
S806:LMF获取UAV的位置信息;其中,UAV的位置信息可表示UAV的位置和/或移动速度。S806: The LMF acquires the location information of the UAV; wherein, the location information of the UAV may represent the location and/or moving speed of the UAV.
S806的具体内容可参考S401,此处不再赘述。For the specific content of S806, reference may be made to S401, which will not be repeated here.
S807:LMF向GMLC发送定位结果(location result),其中,该定位结果可包含UAV的位置信息。S807: The LMF sends a location result (location result) to the GMLC, where the location result may include UAV location information.
其中,定位结果可包含在定位通知消息(例如,Nlmf_Location_Notify)中。Wherein, the location result may be included in a location notification message (for example, Nlmf_Location_Notify).
在S807之后,GMLC可通过以下两种实施方式来向AF发送定位相关的信息。After S807, the GMLC can send location-related information to the AF through the following two implementation manners.
实施方式一:Implementation mode one:
S808:GMLC可根据定位结果和设定移动信息,向NEF发送通信消息(例如,Ngmlc_Location_EventNotify)。S808: The GMLC may send a communication message (for example, Ngmlc_Location_EventNotify) to the NEF according to the positioning result and the set movement information.
具体的,GMLC可对比定位结果中的位置信息和设定移动信息,当位置信息相对于设定移动信息发生偏移时,向NEF发送通信消息。该通知消息中可包含用于指示位置信息相对于设定移动信息发生偏移的通知信息(也可以称为事件(Event))。当终端设备的位置相对于设定移动信息发生偏移时,该事件可为位置偏移事件;当终端设备的移动速度相对于设定移动信息发生偏移时,该事件可为速度偏移事件。Specifically, the GMLC can compare the position information in the positioning result with the set movement information, and send a communication message to the NEF when the position information deviates from the set movement information. The notification message may include notification information (also referred to as an event (Event)) for indicating that the location information deviates from the set movement information. When the position of the terminal device deviates from the set movement information, the event can be a position deviation event; when the movement speed of the terminal device deviates from the set movement information, the event can be a speed deviation event .
S808的具体内容可参考对S503的说明,此处不再赘述。For specific content of S808, reference may be made to the description of S503, which will not be repeated here.
S809:NEF向AF发送上述通知信息。这样,AF在接收到通知信息后,可以确定该UAV是否按照设定移动信息移动,例如,是否按照设定飞行线路飞行。S809: The NEF sends the above notification information to the AF. In this way, after receiving the notification information, the AF can determine whether the UAV moves according to the set movement information, for example, whether to fly according to the set flight route.
在一些可能的实现方式中,LMF也可以根据定位结果和设定移动信息,向NEF发送通信消息。此时,在S803和S804中,GMLC可以通过AMF向LMF发送设定移动信息。在S806之后,LMF获取UAV的位置信息之后,可根据定位结果和设定移动信息,向NEF发送通信消息,具体内容可参考S808。In some possible implementation manners, the LMF may also send a communication message to the NEF according to the positioning result and the set movement information. At this time, in S803 and S804, the GMLC may send the setting movement information to the LMF through the AMF. After S806, after the LMF obtains the location information of the UAV, it can send a communication message to the NEF according to the positioning result and the set movement information. For details, please refer to S808.
在另一些可能的实现方式中,NEF也可以根据定位结果和设定移动信息,向AF发送通信消息。此时,在S802中,NEF可以不向GMLC发送设定移动信息。在S806之后,LMF获取UAV的位置信息之后,可依次通过AMF和GMLC向NEF发送定位结果。然后,NEF可根据定位结果和设定移动信息,向AF发送通信消息,具体内容可参考S808。In some other possible implementation manners, the NEF may also send a communication message to the AF according to the positioning result and the set movement information. At this time, in S802, the NEF may not send the setting movement information to the GMLC. After S806, after the LMF obtains the location information of the UAV, it may send the positioning results to the NEF through the AMF and the GMLC in sequence. Then, the NEF may send a communication message to the AF according to the positioning result and the set movement information. For details, please refer to S808.
在实际应用中,发起定位请求的通信设备并不一定需要一直获取UAV的位置信息。如上述场景1所述,当UAV按照预定飞行路径飞行时,USS并不需要频繁获取UAV的位 置信息。通过该实施方式一,当UAV的位置信息相对设定移动信息发生偏移时,控制面网元才向AF发送该通知信息,以便通知UAV的位置信息相对于设定移动信息发生偏移。这样,无需每次获取到UAV的位置信息就向AF发送位置信息,从而可以减少信令交互。In practical applications, the communication device that initiates the positioning request does not necessarily need to obtain the location information of the UAV all the time. As mentioned in Scenario 1 above, when the UAV is flying according to the predetermined flight path, the USS does not need to frequently acquire the UAV’s position configuration information. Through the first embodiment, when the position information of the UAV deviates from the set movement information, the control plane network element sends the notification information to the AF, so as to notify that the position information of the UAV deviates from the set movement information. In this way, the location information of the UAV does not need to be sent to the AF every time the location information of the UAV is acquired, thereby reducing signaling interaction.
实施方式二:Implementation mode two:
在S801和S802中,GMLC还可接收用于通知第一周期的信息。其中,第一周期的具体内容可参考图5所示方法中的步骤A1,此处不再赘述。In S801 and S802, the GMLC may also receive information for notifying the first cycle. Wherein, for the specific content of the first period, reference may be made to step A1 in the method shown in FIG. 5 , which will not be repeated here.
S810:GMLC根据第一周期设置定时器,定时器的定时时间为第一周期。S810: The GMLC sets a timer according to the first period, and the timing time of the timer is the first period.
其中,GMLC在向NEF发送S808中的通知消息之后,可将定时器归零,重新启动该定时器。Wherein, after the GMLC sends the notification message in S808 to the NEF, it can reset the timer to zero and restart the timer.
S811:当定时器的时间到达第一周期时,GMLC向NEF发送通知消息(例如,Ngmlc_Location_EventNotify)。S811: When the time of the timer reaches the first period, the GMLC sends a notification message (for example, Ngmlc_Location_EventNotify) to the NEF.
其中,该通知消息中可包含最新的定位结果(例如,包括UAV的最新的位置信息)。Wherein, the notification message may include the latest positioning result (for example, including the latest location information of the UAV).
S812:NEF向AF发送上述最新的定位结果。这样,AF可以确定该UAV是否按照设定移动信息移动,例如,是否按照设定飞行线路飞行。S812: The NEF sends the latest positioning result to the AF. In this way, the AF can determine whether the UAV is moving according to the set movement information, for example, whether it is flying according to the set flight path.
在一些可能的实现方式中,LMF也可以根据第一周期发送通信消息。此时,在S803和S804中,GMLC可以通过AMF向LMF发送用于指示第一周期的信息。在S806之后,LMF可根据第一周期向NEF发送通信消息。In some possible implementation manners, the LMF may also send the communication message according to the first period. At this time, in S803 and S804, the GMLC may send information for indicating the first period to the LMF through the AMF. After S806, the LMF may send a communication message to the NEF according to the first period.
在另一些可能的实现方式中,NEF也可以根据第一周期向AF发送通信消息。此时,在S802中,NEF可以不向GMLC发送用于指示第一周期的信息。在S806之后,LMF获取UAV的位置信息之后,可依次通过AMF、GMLC向NEF发送定位结果。然后,NEF可根据第一周期向AF发送通信消息。In some other possible implementation manners, the NEF may also send the communication message to the AF according to the first period. At this time, in S802, the NEF may not send the information for indicating the first cycle to the GMLC. After S806, after the LMF obtains the location information of the UAV, it may send the positioning results to the NEF through the AMF and the GMLC in sequence. Then, the NEF may send a communication message to the AF according to the first period.
在该实施方式二中,控制面网元可根据第一周期向AF发送位置信息。这样,不管UAV的位置信息相对于设定移动信息是否发生偏移,也就是说,即便位置信息和设定移动信息相吻合,AF也可以获得UAV的位置信息,从而避免AF长时间不能获得UAV的位置信息,进而使得AF可根据位置信息对UAV的移动进行有效管理。In the second embodiment, the control plane network element may send location information to the AF according to the first period. In this way, regardless of whether the UAV’s position information is offset relative to the set movement information, that is, even if the position information matches the set movement information, AF can also obtain the UAV’s position information, thereby preventing AF from being unable to obtain the UAV for a long time location information, so that AF can effectively manage the movement of UAV according to the location information.
基于相同的技术构思,本申请还提供了一种通信装置,该装置的结构如图9所示,包括通信单元901和处理单元902。所述通信装置900可以应用于图1所示的通信系统中的NEF、或者应用于图2所示的通信系统中的LMF、GMLC或NEF,并可以实现以上本申请实施例以及实例提供的通信方法。下面对所述装置900中的各个单元的功能进行介绍。Based on the same technical concept, the present application also provides a communication device, the structure of which is shown in FIG. 9 , including a communication unit 901 and a processing unit 902 . The communication device 900 can be applied to the NEF in the communication system shown in Figure 1, or to the LMF, GMLC or NEF in the communication system shown in Figure 2, and can realize the communication provided by the above embodiments and examples of this application method. The functions of each unit in the apparatus 900 are introduced below.
所述通信单元901,用于接收和发送数据。The communication unit 901 is configured to receive and send data.
当所述通信装置900应用于LMF、GMLC或NEF时,所述通信单元901可以通过物理接口、通信模块、通信接口、输入输出接口实现。所述通信装置900可以通过该通信单元连接网线或电缆,进而与其他设备建立物理连接。When the communication device 900 is applied to LMF, GMLC or NEF, the communication unit 901 may be realized through a physical interface, a communication module, a communication interface, and an input/output interface. The communication device 900 can be connected with a network cable or cable through the communication unit, and then establish a physical connection with other devices.
在一种实施方式中,所述通信装置900应用于图4或图7所示的本申请实施例中的控制面网元(例如,图4的控制面网元,图7的LMF)。下面对该实施方式中的所述处理单元902的具体功能进行介绍。In an implementation manner, the communication device 900 is applied to a control plane network element in the embodiment of the present application shown in FIG. 4 or FIG. 7 (eg, the control plane network element in FIG. 4 , or the LMF in FIG. 7 ). The specific functions of the processing unit 902 in this embodiment will be introduced below.
所述处理单元902,用于:The processing unit 902 is configured to:
获取终端设备的位置信息;其中,所述位置信息用于表示所述终端设备的位置和/或移 动速度;当所述位置信息满足第一条件时,通过所述通信单元901向所述终端设备或所述终端设备接入的AN设备发送第一定位周期配置信息;其中,所述第一定位周期配置信息用于指示所述第一条件对应的第一定位周期。Acquiring location information of the terminal device; wherein the location information is used to indicate the location and/or movement of the terminal device moving speed; when the position information satisfies the first condition, send the first positioning cycle configuration information to the terminal device or the AN device connected to the terminal device through the communication unit 901; wherein, the first positioning The period configuration information is used to indicate the first positioning period corresponding to the first condition.
可选的,所述处理单元902具体用于:通过所述通信单元901接收来自第一通信设备的第一信息;其中,所述第一信息包含所述第一条件与所述第一定位周期的对应关系。Optionally, the processing unit 902 is specifically configured to: receive first information from the first communication device through the communication unit 901; wherein the first information includes the first condition and the first positioning period corresponding relationship.
可选的,所述处理单元902具体用于:当所述位置信息满足第一条件时,根据所述第一信息和所述位置信息,确定所述第一定位周期配置信息。Optionally, the processing unit 902 is specifically configured to: when the location information satisfies a first condition, determine the first positioning cycle configuration information according to the first information and the location information.
可选的,所述处理单元902具体用于:在获取终端设备的位置信息之前,通过所述通信单元901向所述终端设备或所述终端设备接入的AN设备发送第二定位周期配置信息,所述第二定位周期配置信息用于指示所述第二定位周期。Optionally, the processing unit 902 is specifically configured to: before acquiring the location information of the terminal device, send the second positioning period configuration information to the terminal device or the AN device connected to the terminal device through the communication unit 901 , the second positioning period configuration information is used to indicate the second positioning period.
可选的,所述处理单元902具体用于:通过所述通信单元901向第二通信设备发送用于指示所述第二定位周期的信息,以及所述位置信息。Optionally, the processing unit 902 is specifically configured to: send information indicating the second positioning period and the location information to the second communication device through the communication unit 901 .
可选的,所述处理单元902具体用于:通过所述通信单元901接收来自第一通信设备的用于指示所述第二定位周期的信息。Optionally, the processing unit 902 is specifically configured to: use the communication unit 901 to receive information indicating the second positioning period from the first communication device.
可选的,所述第一条件包括以下至少一项:Optionally, the first condition includes at least one of the following:
所述终端设备的位置位于第一位置范围内;The location of the terminal device is within a first location range;
所述终端设备的位置位于第二位置范围外;The location of the terminal device is outside the second location range;
所述终端设备的移动速度位于第一速度范围内;The moving speed of the terminal device is within a first speed range;
所述终端设备的移动速度位于第二速度范围外。The moving speed of the terminal device is outside the second speed range.
在一种实施方式中,所述通信装置900应用于图5或图8中任一项所示的本申请实施例中的控制面网元(例如,图5的控制面网元,图8的GMLC)。下面对该实施方式中的所述处理单元902的具体功能进行介绍。In one implementation manner, the communication device 900 is applied to the control plane network element in the embodiment of the present application shown in any one of FIG. 5 or FIG. 8 (for example, the control plane network element in FIG. 5 , the network element in FIG. GMLC). The specific functions of the processing unit 902 in this embodiment will be introduced below.
所述处理单元902,用于:The processing unit 902 is configured to:
获取终端设备的设定移动信息;获取所述终端设备的位置信息;其中,所述位置信息用于表示所述终端设备的位置和/或移动速度;根据所述设定移动信息和所述位置信息,通过所述通信单元901向第二通信设备发送通知信息;其中,所述通知信息用于指示所述位置信息相对于所述设定移动信息发生偏移。Obtain the set movement information of the terminal device; acquire the position information of the terminal device; wherein the position information is used to indicate the position and/or movement speed of the terminal device; according to the set movement information and the position Information, sending notification information to the second communication device through the communication unit 901; wherein the notification information is used to indicate that the location information is offset relative to the set movement information.
可选的,所述处理单元902具体用于:当所述位置信息与所述设定移动信息之间的偏移大于或等于第一阈值时,通过所述通信单元901向所述第二通信设备发送所述通知信息。Optionally, the processing unit 902 is specifically configured to: when the offset between the position information and the set movement information is greater than or equal to a first threshold, communicate to the second through the communication unit 901 The device sends the notification information.
可选的,所述处理单元902具体用于:在向所述第二通信设备发送所述通知信息之前,获取所述第一阈值。Optionally, the processing unit 902 is specifically configured to: acquire the first threshold before sending the notification information to the second communication device.
可选的,所述处理单元902具体用于:通过所述通信单元901接收来自第一通信设备的所述设定移动信息。Optionally, the processing unit 902 is specifically configured to: receive the set movement information from the first communication device through the communication unit 901 .
可选的,所述设定移动信息包括以下至少一项:Optionally, the set mobile information includes at least one of the following:
所述终端设备的设定移动路径;The set moving path of the terminal device;
所述终端设备在至少一个时间点的设定位置;The set position of the terminal device at at least one time point;
所述终端设备的设定移动速度;The set moving speed of the terminal device;
所述终端设备的设定速度范围。The set speed range of the terminal device.
可选的,所述处理单元902具体用于:通过所述通信单元901向所述第二通信设备发 送所述终端设备的位置信息。Optionally, the processing unit 902 is specifically configured to: send a message to the second communication device through the communication unit 901 Send the location information of the terminal device.
可选的,所述处理单元902具体用于:当所述终端设备的位置信息与所述设定移动信息之间的偏移大于或等于第一阈值时,通过所述通信单元901向所述第二通信设备发送所述终端设备的位置信息。Optionally, the processing unit 902 is specifically configured to: send a message to the The second communication device sends the location information of the terminal device.
可选的,所述处理单元902具体用于:获取用于指示第一周期的信息;根据所述第一周期,通过所述通信单元901向所述第二通信设备发送所述终端设备的位置信息。Optionally, the processing unit 902 is specifically configured to: acquire information indicating a first cycle; send the location of the terminal device to the second communication device through the communication unit 901 according to the first cycle information.
在一种实施方式中,所述通信装置900应用于图6或图所示的本申请实施例中的控制面网元(例如,图6的控制面网元,图8的GMLC)。下面对该实施方式中的所述处理单元902的具体功能进行介绍。In an implementation manner, the communication device 900 is applied to a control plane network element in the embodiment of the present application shown in FIG. 6 or the figure (for example, the control plane network element in FIG. 6 , or the GMLC in FIG. 8 ). The specific functions of the processing unit 902 in this embodiment will be introduced below.
所述处理单元902,用于:The processing unit 902 is configured to:
获取用于指示第一周期的信息;根据第一周期,通过所述通信单元901向第二通信设备发送终端设备的位置信息。其中,第一周期大于终端设备的定位周期。Acquiring information for indicating the first period; according to the first period, sending the location information of the terminal device to the second communication device through the communication unit 901 . Wherein, the first period is greater than the positioning period of the terminal device.
所述处理单元902,具体用于:获取终端设备的设定移动信息;获取所述终端设备的位置信息;其中,所述位置信息用于表示所述终端设备的位置和/或移动速度;根据所述设定移动信息和所述位置信息,通过所述通信单元901向第二通信设备发送通知信息;其中,所述通知信息用于指示所述位置信息相对于所述设定移动信息发生偏移。The processing unit 902 is specifically configured to: obtain set movement information of the terminal device; obtain location information of the terminal device; wherein the location information is used to indicate the location and/or moving speed of the terminal device; according to The set movement information and the position information send notification information to the second communication device through the communication unit 901; wherein the notification information is used to indicate that the position information deviates from the set movement information. shift.
可选的,所述处理单元902具体用于:当所述位置信息与所述设定移动信息之间的偏移大于或等于第一阈值时,通过所述通信单元901向所述第二通信设备发送所述通知信息。Optionally, the processing unit 902 is specifically configured to: when the offset between the position information and the set movement information is greater than or equal to a first threshold, communicate to the second through the communication unit 901 The device sends the notification information.
可选的,所述处理单元902具体用于:在向所述第二通信设备发送所述通知信息之前,获取所述第一阈值。Optionally, the processing unit 902 is specifically configured to: acquire the first threshold before sending the notification information to the second communication device.
可选的,所述处理单元902具体用于:通过所述通信单元901接收来自第一通信设备的所述设定移动信息。Optionally, the processing unit 902 is specifically configured to: receive the set movement information from the first communication device through the communication unit 901 .
可选的,所述设定移动信息包括以下至少一项:Optionally, the set mobile information includes at least one of the following:
所述终端设备的设定移动路径;The set moving path of the terminal device;
所述终端设备在至少一个时间点的设定位置;The set position of the terminal device at at least one time point;
所述终端设备的设定移动速度;The set moving speed of the terminal device;
所述终端设备的设定速度范围。The set speed range of the terminal device.
可选的,所述处理单元902具体用于:通过所述通信单元901向所述第二通信设备发送所述终端设备的位置信息。Optionally, the processing unit 902 is specifically configured to: send the location information of the terminal device to the second communication device through the communication unit 901 .
可选的,所述处理单元902具体用于:当所述终端设备的位置信息与所述设定移动信息之间的偏移大于或等于第一阈值时,通过所述通信单元901向所述第二通信设备发送所述终端设备的位置信息。Optionally, the processing unit 902 is specifically configured to: send a message to the The second communication device sends the location information of the terminal device.
需要说明的是,本申请以上实施例中对模块的划分是示意性的,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式,另外,在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中,也可以是单独物理存在,也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。上述集成的单元既可以采用硬件的形式实现,也可以采用软件功能单元的形式实现。It should be noted that the division of modules in the above embodiments of the present application is schematic, and is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be other division methods. In addition, each function in each embodiment of the present application Units can be integrated into one processing unit, or physically exist separately, or two or more units can be integrated into one unit. The above-mentioned integrated units can be implemented in the form of hardware or in the form of software functional units.
所述集成的单元如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时,可 以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解,本申请的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的全部或部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来,该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中,包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机,服务器,或者网络设备等)或处理器(processor)执行本申请各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括:U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器(Read-Only Memory,ROM)、随机存取存储器(Random Access Memory,RAM)、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。If the integrated unit is realized in the form of a software function unit and sold or used as an independent product, it may to be stored in a computer-readable storage medium. Based on this understanding, the technical solution of the present application is essentially or part of the contribution to the prior art or all or part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product, and the computer software product is stored in a storage medium , including several instructions to make a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) or a processor (processor) execute all or part of the steps of the methods described in the various embodiments of the present application. The aforementioned storage medium includes: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (Read-Only Memory, ROM), random access memory (Random Access Memory, RAM), magnetic disk or optical disk and other various media that can store program codes. .
基于相同的技术构思,本申请还提供了一种通信设备,所述通信设备可以应用于如图1所示的通信系统中的NEF、或者应用于图2所示的通信系统中的LMF、GMLC或NEF,可以实现以上本申请实施例以及实例提供的通信方法,具有图9所示的通信装置的功能。参阅图10所示,所述通信设备1000包括:通信模块1001、处理器1002以及存储器1003。其中,所述通信模块1001、所述处理器1002以及所述存储器1003之间相互连接。Based on the same technical idea, this application also provides a communication device, which can be applied to the NEF in the communication system shown in Figure 1, or the LMF and GMLC in the communication system shown in Figure 2 Or the NEF can implement the communication methods provided in the above embodiments and examples of the present application, and has the functions of the communication device shown in FIG. 9 . Referring to FIG. 10 , the communication device 1000 includes: a communication module 1001 , a processor 1002 and a memory 1003 . Wherein, the communication module 1001, the processor 1002 and the memory 1003 are connected to each other.
可选的,所述通信模块1001、所述处理器1002以及所述存储器1003之间通过总线1004相互连接。所述总线1004可以是外设部件互连标准(peripheral component interconnect,PCI)总线或扩展工业标准结构(extended industry standard architecture,EISA)总线等。所述总线可以分为地址总线、数据总线、控制总线等。为便于表示,图10中仅用一条粗线表示,但并不表示仅有一根总线或一种类型的总线。Optionally, the communication module 1001 , the processor 1002 and the memory 1003 are connected to each other through a bus 1004 . The bus 1004 may be a peripheral component interconnect standard (peripheral component interconnect, PCI) bus or an extended industry standard architecture (extended industry standard architecture, EISA) bus or the like. The bus can be divided into address bus, data bus, control bus and so on. For ease of representation, only one thick line is used in FIG. 10 , but it does not mean that there is only one bus or one type of bus.
所述通信模块1001,用于接收和发送数据,实现与其他设备之间的通信交互。例如,当所述通信设备1000应用于LMF、GMLC或NEF时,所述通信模块1001可以通过物理接口、通信模块、通信接口、输入输出接口实现。The communication module 1001 is used to receive and send data to realize communication interaction with other devices. For example, when the communication device 1000 is applied to LMF, GMLC or NEF, the communication module 1001 may be realized through a physical interface, a communication module, a communication interface, and an input/output interface.
在一种实施方式中,所述通信设备1000应用于图4或图7所示的本申请实施例中的控制面网元(例如,图4的控制面网元,图7的LMF)。所述处理器1002具体用于:In an implementation manner, the communication device 1000 is applied to a control plane network element in the embodiment of the present application shown in FIG. 4 or FIG. 7 (eg, the control plane network element in FIG. 4 , or the LMF in FIG. 7 ). The processor 1002 is specifically used for:
获取终端设备的位置信息;其中,所述位置信息用于表示所述终端设备的位置和/或移动速度;当所述位置信息满足第一条件时,通过所述通信模块1001向所述终端设备或所述终端设备接入的AN设备发送第一定位周期配置信息;其中,所述第一定位周期配置信息用于指示所述第一条件对应的第一定位周期。Obtaining the location information of the terminal device; wherein, the location information is used to indicate the location and/or moving speed of the terminal device; when the location information satisfies a first condition, send the terminal device a Or the AN device accessed by the terminal device sends first positioning cycle configuration information; wherein the first positioning cycle configuration information is used to indicate the first positioning cycle corresponding to the first condition.
在一种实施方式中,所述通信设备1000应用于图5或图8所示的本申请实施例中的控制面网元(例如,图5的控制面网元,图8的GMLC)。所述处理器1002具体用于:In an implementation manner, the communication device 1000 is applied to a control plane network element in the embodiment of the present application shown in FIG. 5 or FIG. 8 (eg, the control plane network element in FIG. 5 , or the GMLC in FIG. 8 ). The processor 1002 is specifically used for:
获取终端设备的设定移动信息;获取所述终端设备的位置信息;其中,所述位置信息用于表示所述终端设备的位置和/或移动速度;根据所述设定移动信息和所述位置信息,通过所述通信模块1001向第二通信设备发送通知信息;其中,所述通知信息用于指示所述位置信息相对于所述设定移动信息发生偏移。Obtain the set movement information of the terminal device; acquire the position information of the terminal device; wherein the position information is used to indicate the position and/or movement speed of the terminal device; according to the set movement information and the position Information, sending notification information to the second communication device through the communication module 1001; wherein the notification information is used to indicate that the location information is offset relative to the set movement information.
在一种实施方式中,所述通信设备1000应用于图6或图8所示的本申请实施例中的控制面网元(例如,图6的控制面网元,图8的GMLC)。所述处理器1002具体用于:In an implementation manner, the communication device 1000 is applied to a control plane network element in the embodiment of the present application shown in FIG. 6 or FIG. 8 (eg, the control plane network element in FIG. 6 , or the GMLC in FIG. 8 ). The processor 1002 is specifically used for:
获取用于指示第一周期的信息;根据第一周期,通过所述通信模块1001向第二通信设备发送终端设备的位置信息。其中,第一周期大于终端设备的定位周期。Acquiring information for indicating the first period; sending the location information of the terminal device to the second communication device through the communication module 1001 according to the first period. Wherein, the first period is greater than the positioning period of the terminal device.
所述处理器1002的具体功能可以参考以上本申请实施例以及实例提供的通信方法中的描述,以及图9所示本申请实施例中对所述通信装置900的具体功能描述,此处不再赘述。 For the specific functions of the processor 1002, please refer to the descriptions in the above embodiments of the application and the communication methods provided in the examples, as well as the specific function description of the communication device 900 in the embodiment of the application shown in FIG. 9 , which will not be repeated here. repeat.
所述存储器1003,用于存放程序指令和数据等。具体地,程序指令可以包括程序代码,该程序代码包括计算机操作指令。存储器1003可能包含随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM),也可能还包括非易失性存储器(non-volatile memory),例如至少一个磁盘存储器。处理器1002执行存储器1003所存放的程序指令,并使用所述存储器1003中存储的数据,实现上述功能,从而实现上述本申请实施例提供的通信方法。The memory 1003 is used to store program instructions and data. Specifically, the program instructions may include program codes including computer operation instructions. The memory 1003 may include a random access memory (random access memory, RAM), and may also include a non-volatile memory (non-volatile memory), such as at least one disk memory. The processor 1002 executes the program instructions stored in the memory 1003, and uses the data stored in the memory 1003 to implement the above functions, thereby realizing the communication method provided by the above embodiments of the present application.
可以理解,本申请图10中的存储器1003可以是易失性存储器或非易失性存储器,或可包括易失性和非易失性存储器两者。其中,非易失性存储器可以是只读存储器(Read-Only Memory,ROM)、可编程只读存储器(Programmable ROM,PROM)、可擦除可编程只读存储器(Erasable PROM,EPROM)、电可擦除可编程只读存储器(Electrically EPROM,EEPROM)或闪存。易失性存储器可以是随机存取存储器(Random Access Memory,RAM),其用作外部高速缓存。通过示例性但不是限制性说明,许多形式的RAM可用,例如静态随机存取存储器(Static RAM,SRAM)、动态随机存取存储器(Dynamic RAM,DRAM)、同步动态随机存取存储器(Synchronous DRAM,SDRAM)、双倍数据速率同步动态随机存取存储器(Double Data Rate SDRAM,DDR SDRAM)、增强型同步动态随机存取存储器(Enhanced SDRAM,ESDRAM)、同步连接动态随机存取存储器(Synchlink DRAM,SLDRAM)和直接内存总线随机存取存储器(Direct Rambus RAM,DR RAM)。应注意,本文描述的系统和方法的存储器旨在包括但不限于这些和任意其它适合类型的存储器。It can be understood that the memory 1003 in FIG. 10 of the present application may be a volatile memory or a non-volatile memory, or may include both volatile and non-volatile memories. Among them, the non-volatile memory can be read-only memory (Read-Only Memory, ROM), programmable read-only memory (Programmable ROM, PROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (Erasable PROM, EPROM), electronically programmable Erase Programmable Read-Only Memory (Electrically EPROM, EEPROM) or Flash. The volatile memory can be Random Access Memory (RAM), which acts as external cache memory. By way of illustration and not limitation, many forms of RAM are available, such as Static Random Access Memory (Static RAM, SRAM), Dynamic Random Access Memory (Dynamic RAM, DRAM), Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory (Synchronous DRAM, SDRAM), double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory (Double Data Rate SDRAM, DDR SDRAM), enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory (Enhanced SDRAM, ESDRAM), synchronous connection dynamic random access memory (Synchlink DRAM, SLDRAM ) and Direct Memory Bus Random Access Memory (Direct Rambus RAM, DR RAM). It should be noted that the memory of the systems and methods described herein is intended to include, but not be limited to, these and any other suitable types of memory.
基于以上实施例,本申请实施例还提供了一种计算机程序,当所述计算机程序在计算机上运行时,使得所述计算机执行以上实施例提供的通信方法。Based on the above embodiments, an embodiment of the present application further provides a computer program that, when the computer program is run on a computer, causes the computer to execute the communication method provided by the above embodiments.
基于以上实施例,本申请实施例还提供了一种计算机可读存储介质,该计算机可读存储介质中存储有计算机程序,所述计算机程序被计算机执行时,使得计算机执行以上实施例提供的通信方法。Based on the above embodiments, the embodiments of the present application also provide a computer-readable storage medium, in which a computer program is stored. When the computer program is executed by a computer, the computer executes the communication provided by the above embodiments. method.
其中,存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质。以此为例但不限于:计算机可读介质可以包括RAM、ROM、EEPROM、CD-ROM或其他光盘存储、磁盘存储介质或者其他磁存储设备、或者能够用于携带或存储具有指令或数据结构形式的期望的程序代码并能够由计算机存取的任何其他介质。Wherein, the storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer. By way of example but not limitation: computer-readable media may include RAM, ROM, EEPROM, CD-ROM or other optical disk storage, magnetic disk storage media or other magnetic storage devices, or may be used to carry or store information in the form of instructions or data structures desired program code and any other medium that can be accessed by a computer.
基于以上实施例,本申请实施例还提供了一种芯片,所述芯片用于读取存储器中存储的计算机程序,实现以上实施例提供的通信方法。Based on the above embodiments, the embodiments of the present application further provide a chip, the chip is configured to read a computer program stored in a memory, and implement the communication method provided by the above embodiments.
基于以上实施例,本申请实施例提供了一种芯片系统,该芯片系统包括处理器,用于支持计算机装置实现以上实施例中业务设备、转发设备或站点设备所涉及的功能。在一种可能的设计中,所述芯片系统还包括存储器,所述存储器用于保存该计算机装置必要的程序和数据。该芯片系统,可以由芯片构成,也可以包含芯片和其他分立器件。Based on the above embodiments, an embodiment of the present application provides a chip system, the chip system includes a processor, configured to support a computer device to implement the functions involved in the service device, forwarding device, or site device in the above embodiments. In a possible design, the chip system further includes a memory, and the memory is used to store necessary programs and data of the computer device. The system-on-a-chip may consist of chips, or may include chips and other discrete devices.
综上所述,本申请实施例提供了一种通信方法、装置及设备,在该方法中,控制面网元可获取终端设备的位置信息,其中,该位置信息可用于表示终端设备的位置和/或移动速度。当该位置信息满足第一条件时,控制面网元可向终端设备或终端设备接入的AN设备发送第一定位周期配置信息,其中,第一定位周期配置信息可用于指示第一条件对应的第一定位周期。通过该方案,当终端设备的位置信息满足第一条件时,控制面网元即可发送用于指示与第一条件对应的第一定位周期的信息;这样,控制面网元即可根据终端设备的位置信息对定位周期进行更新,无需重新发起定位流程,从而可以减少发起请求定位的通信设备(例如,终端设备或USS)与控制面网元之间的交互,简化定位流程。 To sum up, the embodiments of the present application provide a communication method, device, and equipment. In this method, the control plane network element can obtain the location information of the terminal equipment, where the location information can be used to indicate the location and location of the terminal equipment. /or movement speed. When the location information satisfies the first condition, the control plane network element may send the first location cycle configuration information to the terminal device or the AN device accessed by the terminal device, where the first location cycle configuration information may be used to indicate the location corresponding to the first condition. The first positioning cycle. Through this solution, when the location information of the terminal device satisfies the first condition, the control plane network element can send information indicating the first positioning period corresponding to the first condition; The positioning cycle is updated by the location information of the new location information without re-initiating the positioning process, thereby reducing the interaction between the communication device that initiates the positioning request (for example, a terminal device or USS) and the network element of the control plane, and simplifying the positioning process.
在本申请的各个实施例中,如果没有特殊说明以及逻辑冲突,不同的实施例之间的术语和/或描述具有一致性、且可以相互引用,不同的实施例中的技术特征根据其内在的逻辑关系可以组合形成新的实施例。In each embodiment of the present application, if there is no special explanation and logical conflict, the terms and/or descriptions between different embodiments are consistent and can be referred to each other, and the technical features in different embodiments are based on their inherent Logical relationships can be combined to form new embodiments.
本领域内的技术人员应明白,本申请的实施例可提供为方法、系统、或计算机程序产品。因此,本申请可采用完全硬件实施例、完全软件实施例、或结合软件和硬件方面的实施例的形式。而且,本申请可采用在一个或多个其中包含有计算机可用程序代码的计算机可用存储介质(包括但不限于磁盘存储器、CD-ROM、光学存储器等)上实施的计算机程序产品的形式。Those skilled in the art should understand that the embodiments of the present application may be provided as methods, systems, or computer program products. Accordingly, the present application may take the form of an entirely hardware embodiment, an entirely software embodiment, or an embodiment combining software and hardware aspects. Furthermore, the present application may take the form of a computer program product embodied on one or more computer-usable storage media (including but not limited to disk storage, CD-ROM, optical storage, etc.) having computer-usable program code embodied therein.
本申请是参照根据本申请的方法、设备(系统)、和计算机程序产品的流程图和/或方框图来描述的。应理解可由计算机程序指令实现流程图和/或方框图中的每一流程和/或方框、以及流程图和/或方框图中的流程和/或方框的结合。可提供这些计算机程序指令到通用计算机、专用计算机、嵌入式处理机或其他可编程数据处理设备的处理器以产生一个机器,使得通过计算机或其他可编程数据处理设备的处理器执行的指令产生用于实现在流程图一个流程或多个流程和/或方框图一个方框或多个方框中指定的功能的装置。The present application is described with reference to flowchart illustrations and/or block diagrams of methods, apparatus (systems), and computer program products according to the present application. It should be understood that each procedure and/or block in the flowchart and/or block diagram, and a combination of procedures and/or blocks in the flowchart and/or block diagram can be realized by computer program instructions. These computer program instructions may be provided to a general purpose computer, special purpose computer, embedded processor, or processor of other programmable data processing equipment to produce a machine such that the instructions executed by the processor of the computer or other programmable data processing equipment produce a An apparatus for realizing the functions specified in one or more procedures of the flowchart and/or one or more blocks of the block diagram.
这些计算机程序指令也可存储在能引导计算机或其他可编程数据处理设备以特定方式工作的计算机可读存储器中,使得存储在该计算机可读存储器中的指令产生包括指令装置的制造品,该指令装置实现在流程图一个流程或多个流程和/或方框图一个方框或多个方框中指定的功能。These computer program instructions may also be stored in a computer-readable memory capable of directing a computer or other programmable data processing apparatus to operate in a specific manner, such that the instructions stored in the computer-readable memory produce an article of manufacture comprising instruction means, the instructions The device realizes the function specified in one or more procedures of the flowchart and/or one or more blocks of the block diagram.
这些计算机程序指令也可装载到计算机或其他可编程数据处理设备上,使得在计算机或其他可编程设备上执行一系列操作步骤以产生计算机实现的处理,从而在计算机或其他可编程设备上执行的指令提供用于实现在流程图一个流程或多个流程和/或方框图一个方框或多个方框中指定的功能的步骤。These computer program instructions can also be loaded onto a computer or other programmable data processing device, causing a series of operational steps to be performed on the computer or other programmable device to produce a computer-implemented process, thereby The instructions provide steps for implementing the functions specified in the flow chart or blocks of the flowchart and/or the block or blocks of the block diagrams.
显然,本领域的技术人员可以对本申请进行各种改动和变型而不脱离本申请的范围。这样,倘若本申请的这些修改和变型属于本申请权利要求及其等同技术的范围之内,则本申请也意图包含这些改动和变型在内。 Apparently, those skilled in the art can make various changes and modifications to the present application without departing from the scope of the present application. In this way, if these modifications and variations of the present application fall within the scope of the claims of the present application and their equivalent technologies, the present application is also intended to include these modifications and variations.

Claims (21)

  1. 一种通信方法,应用于控制面网元,其特征在于,包括:A communication method applied to a control plane network element, characterized in that it includes:
    获取终端设备的位置信息;其中,所述位置信息用于表示所述终端设备的位置和/或移动速度;Acquiring location information of the terminal device; wherein the location information is used to indicate the location and/or moving speed of the terminal device;
    当所述位置信息满足第一条件时,向所述终端设备或所述终端设备接入的接入网AN设备发送第一定位周期配置信息;其中,所述第一定位周期配置信息用于指示所述第一条件对应的第一定位周期。When the location information satisfies the first condition, send first positioning cycle configuration information to the terminal device or the access network AN device accessed by the terminal device; wherein the first positioning cycle configuration information is used to indicate The first positioning period corresponding to the first condition.
  2. 如权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method of claim 1, further comprising:
    接收来自第一通信设备的第一信息;其中,所述第一信息包含所述第一条件与所述第一定位周期的对应关系;Receive first information from a first communication device; wherein, the first information includes a correspondence between the first condition and the first positioning cycle;
    当所述位置信息满足第一条件时,根据所述第一信息和所述位置信息,确定所述第一定位周期配置信息。When the location information satisfies the first condition, determine the first positioning cycle configuration information according to the first information and the location information.
  3. 如权利要求1或2所述的方法,其特征在于,在获取终端设备的位置信息之前,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 1 or 2, wherein, before obtaining the location information of the terminal device, the method further comprises:
    向所述终端设备或所述终端设备接入的AN设备发送第二定位周期配置信息,所述第二定位周期配置信息用于指示所述第二定位周期。Sending second positioning cycle configuration information to the terminal device or the AN device accessed by the terminal device, where the second positioning cycle configuration information is used to indicate the second positioning cycle.
  4. 如权利要求3所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method of claim 3, further comprising:
    向第二通信设备发送用于指示所述第二定位周期的信息,以及所述位置信息。Sending the information for indicating the second positioning cycle and the location information to the second communication device.
  5. 如权利要求3或4所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 3 or 4, wherein the method further comprises:
    接收来自第一通信设备的用于指示所述第二定位周期的信息。Information indicating the second positioning period is received from the first communications device.
  6. 如权利要求1至5任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一条件包括以下至少一项:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein the first condition includes at least one of the following:
    所述终端设备的位置位于第一位置范围内;The location of the terminal device is within a first location range;
    所述终端设备的位置位于第二位置范围外;The location of the terminal device is outside the second location range;
    所述终端设备的移动速度位于第一速度范围内;The moving speed of the terminal device is within a first speed range;
    所述终端设备的移动速度位于第二速度范围外。The moving speed of the terminal device is outside the second speed range.
  7. 一种通信方法,应用于控制面网元,其特征在于,包括:A communication method applied to a control plane network element, characterized in that it includes:
    获取终端设备的设定移动信息;Obtain the set mobile information of the terminal device;
    获取所述终端设备的位置信息;其中,所述位置信息用于表示所述终端设备的位置和/或移动速度;Acquiring location information of the terminal device; wherein the location information is used to represent the location and/or moving speed of the terminal device;
    根据所述设定移动信息和所述位置信息,向第二通信设备发送通知信息;其中,所述通知信息用于指示所述位置信息相对于所述设定移动信息发生偏移。Sending notification information to a second communication device according to the set movement information and the location information; wherein the notification information is used to indicate that the location information is offset relative to the set movement information.
  8. 如权利要求7所述的方法,其特征在于,根据所述设定移动信息和所述位置信息,向第二通信设备发送通知信息,包括:The method according to claim 7, wherein, according to the set movement information and the location information, sending notification information to the second communication device includes:
    当所述位置信息与所述设定移动信息之间的偏移大于或等于第一阈值时,向所述第二通信设备发送所述通知信息。When the offset between the location information and the set movement information is greater than or equal to a first threshold, the notification information is sent to the second communication device.
  9. 如权利要求8所述的方法,其特征在于,在向所述第二通信设备发送所述通知信息之前,所述方法还包括: The method according to claim 8, wherein before sending the notification information to the second communication device, the method further comprises:
    获取所述第一阈值。Acquire the first threshold.
  10. 如权利要求7至9任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,获取终端设备的设定移动信息,包括:The method according to any one of claims 7 to 9, wherein obtaining the set mobile information of the terminal device includes:
    接收来自第一通信设备的所述设定移动信息。The set movement information is received from the first communication device.
  11. 如权利要求7至10任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述设定移动信息包括以下至少一项:The method according to any one of claims 7 to 10, wherein said setting mobile information includes at least one of the following:
    所述终端设备的设定移动路径;The set moving path of the terminal device;
    所述终端设备在至少一个时间点的设定位置;The set position of the terminal device at at least one time point;
    所述终端设备的设定移动速度;The set moving speed of the terminal device;
    所述终端设备的设定速度范围。The set speed range of the terminal device.
  12. 如权利要求7至11任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 7 to 11, further comprising:
    向所述第二通信设备发送所述终端设备的位置信息。sending the location information of the terminal device to the second communication device.
  13. 如权利要求12所述的方法,其特征在于,向所述第二通信设备发送所述终端设备的位置信息,包括:The method according to claim 12, wherein sending the location information of the terminal device to the second communication device comprises:
    当所述终端设备的位置信息与所述设定移动信息之间的偏移大于或等于第一阈值时,向所述第二通信设备发送所述终端设备的位置信息。When the deviation between the location information of the terminal device and the set movement information is greater than or equal to a first threshold, sending the location information of the terminal device to the second communication device.
  14. 如权利要求12所述的方法,其特征在于,向所述第二通信设备发送所述终端设备的位置信息,包括:The method according to claim 12, wherein sending the location information of the terminal device to the second communication device comprises:
    获取用于指示第一周期的信息;acquiring information indicating the first cycle;
    根据所述第一周期,向所述第二通信设备发送所述终端设备的位置信息。Send the location information of the terminal device to the second communication device according to the first period.
  15. 一种通信装置,应用于控制面网元,其特征在于,包括:A communication device applied to a control plane network element, characterized in that it includes:
    通信单元,用于接收和发送数据;a communication unit for receiving and sending data;
    处理单元,用于通过所述通信单元,执行如权利要求1-14任一项所述的方法。A processing unit, configured to execute the method according to any one of claims 1-14 through the communication unit.
  16. 一种计算机可读存储介质,其特征在于,所述计算机可读存储介质中存储有计算机程序,当所述计算机程序在计算机上运行时,使得所述计算机执行权利要求1-14任一项所述的方法。A computer-readable storage medium, characterized in that a computer program is stored in the computer-readable storage medium, and when the computer program is run on a computer, the computer is made to execute the computer program described in any one of claims 1-14. described method.
  17. 一种芯片,其特征在于,所述芯片与存储器耦合,所述芯片读取所述存储器中存储的计算机程序,执行权利要求1-14任一项所述的方法。A chip, characterized in that the chip is coupled to a memory, and the chip reads a computer program stored in the memory to execute the method according to any one of claims 1-14.
  18. 一种通信系统,其特征在于,包括:控制面网元和接入网设备,A communication system, characterized in that it includes: a control plane network element and an access network device,
    所述控制面网元,用于获取终端设备的位置信息;其中,所述位置信息用于表示所述终端设备的位置和/或移动速度;当所述位置信息满足第一条件时,向所述终端设备接入的所述接入网设备发送第一定位周期配置信息;其中,所述第一定位周期配置信息用于指示所述第一条件对应的第一定位周期;The control plane network element is configured to acquire location information of the terminal device; wherein the location information is used to indicate the location and/or moving speed of the terminal device; when the location information satisfies a first condition, send to the The access network device accessed by the terminal device sends first positioning cycle configuration information; wherein the first positioning cycle configuration information is used to indicate the first positioning cycle corresponding to the first condition;
    所述接入网设备,用于接收所述第一定位周期配置信息。The access network device is configured to receive the configuration information of the first positioning period.
  19. 如权利要求18所述的通信系统,其特征在于,The communication system according to claim 18, wherein,
    所述控制面网元,还用于接收来自第一通信设备的第一信息;其中,所述第一信息包含所述第一条件与所述第一定位周期的对应关系;当所述位置信息满足第一条件时,根据所述第一信息和所述位置信息,确定所述第一定位周期配置信息。The control plane network element is further configured to receive first information from a first communication device; wherein the first information includes a correspondence between the first condition and the first positioning period; when the location information When the first condition is met, the first positioning cycle configuration information is determined according to the first information and the location information.
  20. 一种通信系统,其特征在于,包括:控制面网元和第二通信设备, A communication system, characterized in that it includes: a control plane network element and a second communication device,
    所述控制面网元,用于获取终端设备的设定移动信息和位置信息;其中,所述位置信息用于表示所述终端设备的位置和/或移动速度;根据所述设定移动信息和所述位置信息,向所述第二通信设备发送通知信息,所述通知信息用于指示所述位置信息相对于所述设定移动信息发生偏移;The control plane network element is configured to obtain set movement information and location information of the terminal device; wherein the location information is used to indicate the location and/or movement speed of the terminal equipment; according to the set movement information and For the location information, sending notification information to the second communication device, where the notification information is used to indicate that the location information is offset relative to the set movement information;
    所述第二通信设备,用于接收所述通知消息。The second communication device is configured to receive the notification message.
  21. 如权利要求20所述的通信系统,其特征在于,The communication system according to claim 20, wherein,
    所述控制面网元,用于根据所述设定移动信息和所述位置信息,向第二通信设备发送通知信息,包括:当所述位置信息与所述设定移动信息之间的偏移大于或等于第一阈值时,向所述第二通信设备发送所述通知信息。 The control plane network element is configured to send notification information to the second communication device according to the set movement information and the position information, including: when the offset between the position information and the set movement information When greater than or equal to the first threshold, the notification information is sent to the second communication device.
PCT/CN2023/078172 2022-03-03 2023-02-24 Communication method and apparatus, and device WO2023165425A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202210203614.4 2022-03-03
CN202210203614.4A CN116744436A (en) 2022-03-03 2022-03-03 Communication method, device and equipment

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2023165425A1 true WO2023165425A1 (en) 2023-09-07

Family

ID=87882968

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2023/078172 WO2023165425A1 (en) 2022-03-03 2023-02-24 Communication method and apparatus, and device

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN116744436A (en)
WO (1) WO2023165425A1 (en)

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN105338466A (en) * 2014-07-08 2016-02-17 华为软件技术有限公司 Location information acquisition method and location information acquisition device
JP2017058347A (en) * 2015-09-18 2017-03-23 カシオ計算機株式会社 Positioning device, positioning method, and program
WO2020191598A1 (en) * 2019-03-25 2020-10-01 华为技术有限公司 Method for determining that terminal device is located inside geofence, and terminal device
CN112584319A (en) * 2019-09-30 2021-03-30 大唐移动通信设备有限公司 Position report period adjusting method, device, network equipment and terminal

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN105338466A (en) * 2014-07-08 2016-02-17 华为软件技术有限公司 Location information acquisition method and location information acquisition device
JP2017058347A (en) * 2015-09-18 2017-03-23 カシオ計算機株式会社 Positioning device, positioning method, and program
WO2020191598A1 (en) * 2019-03-25 2020-10-01 华为技术有限公司 Method for determining that terminal device is located inside geofence, and terminal device
CN112584319A (en) * 2019-09-30 2021-03-30 大唐移动通信设备有限公司 Position report period adjusting method, device, network equipment and terminal

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN116744436A (en) 2023-09-12

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP7041212B2 (en) Connecting to a virtualized mobile core network
US10687175B2 (en) Method for transmitting and receiving V2X message in wireless communication system, and an apparatus for same
US11653178B2 (en) Positioning service level
US11445515B2 (en) Network slice selection based on requested service
CN112534899B (en) Location management component and method for mobile communication network
US9585160B2 (en) Prioritizing location request of a certain type in a congestion situation
US20210345237A1 (en) Communication Method and Communications Apparatus
US10880784B2 (en) Communication method using context information of terminal in wireless communication system, and base station
US20210099870A1 (en) Method and apparatus for performing authorization for unmanned aerial system service in wireless communication system
EP3952599A1 (en) Method for establishing communication bearer, device and system
KR20230095967A (en) Session Management for Aviation Systems
US9049579B2 (en) Method and apparatus for setting terminal connection control information in a mobile communication system
US10993177B2 (en) Network slice instance creation
US20210136671A1 (en) Method and device for performing, by v2x ue, operation related to changing of rat in wireless communication system
WO2023165425A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus, and device
US20240049333A1 (en) Wireless Communications for Sidelink Ranging
KR102388547B1 (en) Efficient UE location reporting in cellular networks
US20240031929A1 (en) Connection Establishment
US20230413225A1 (en) Change of Height of Wireless Device
WO2023179397A1 (en) Licensing method and apparatus
WO2024032654A1 (en) Positioning method and apparatus, and storage medium
US20240064626A1 (en) Support For Network Service
WO2024065178A1 (en) Method and apparatus for sidelink based wireless sensing
WO2022077184A1 (en) Method and apparatus for requesting prs configuration, and communication device and storage medium
WO2023215379A1 (en) Ranging service

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 23762825

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1